تاسیسات الکتریکی و صنعتی

‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻙﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﭘﻲ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻜﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺧﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ژﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺮﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2020‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ %70‬ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻟﻮﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍﺟﻊﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺬ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﻴﺪﺍً ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ))ﺁﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ(( ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺫﻳﺼﻼﺡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺋﻴﻨﻨﺎﻣﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺻﺤﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻬﺪﻩ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺫﻳﺼﻼﺡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻬﻢ ﭘﻴﺸﺒﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ )ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﻪ( ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺭﻛﺎﺭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(EMC‬ﻭ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺻﻪ ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‌ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺕﺍﺙﻱﺭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲ‌ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺕﺍﺙﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ‌ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻲ‌ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‌‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (EMC‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻙ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪EMC‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪1927‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1949‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ‌ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ DIN VDE 0871‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬
‫‪ EN 55013/DIN VDE 0872‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ EN55104/DIN VDE 0875‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫‪ DIN VDE 0876‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‌ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DIN VDE 0879‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‌ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ DIN VDE 0878‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫‌‬ ‫‪DIN VDE 0879‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻼﺱ ‪ B‬ﻳﺎ ‪ A‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ‌ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‌‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ‌ﺁﻻﺕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻼﺱ ‪ B‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻣﻲ ‌ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪) ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻣﻼﻙ (‪.‬‬
‫‌‬
‫ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‌ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ EMC‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫‌‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ EU‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‌‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‌‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺭﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫‌‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ‌ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ‌ﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺂﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﻧﻮﺯﺩﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺁﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺏ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺝ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻩ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻭ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺯ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺡ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻁ( ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻱ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﺎﻭﺭﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﺎ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﺳﻴﻤﻜﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺎ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ )ﻧﺌﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﺸﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺩ( ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﺸﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ – ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﺸﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﻟﻜﻮﻣﻮﺗﻴﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺸﺘﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻩ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯ( ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ )ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻬﮕﻴﺮ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻲﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﮔﺎﻩ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪1-1‬ﻭ ‪1-2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ‪،‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ – ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ– ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫) ‪ 400/230‬ﻭﻟﺖ ( ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-2‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﺯ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻫﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ‪ TT ،TN‬ﻭ ‪IT‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ =T‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ =I‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ =T‬ﺑﺪﻧﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻼﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ =N‬ﺑﺪﻧﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ‪ TN‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ) ‪ (PE‬ﻭ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ )‪ ،(N‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ =S‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻧﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ) ‪ (PE‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ) ‪ (N‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻼﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ =C‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻧﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ )‪ (PEN‬ﻭﺻﻼﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ – ﺧﻨﺜﻲ )‪ (PEN‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ) ‪ (PE‬ﻭ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ) ‪ (N‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ C‬ﻭ ‪S‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ TN-C-S‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ‪ (N‬ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ) ‪ ،(PE‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ 1-‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN-S‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ )‪ (PE‬ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻒ‪ 1 -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN-S‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫–‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ 2 -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN-C-S‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻨﺜﻲ )‪ (PE‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻒ‪ 2-‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN-C-S‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺧﻨﺜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ 3-‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN-C‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‬
‫)‪ (PEN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ 3-‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN-C‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ – ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ‪ TN-C-S‬ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪ TN-S‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻬﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TT‬ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ )ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ( ﺑﻬﺮﻫﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TT‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪TT‬‬
‫ﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ IT‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪TT‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻴﻦﻫﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫‪-3‬‬
‫‪-4‬‬
‫‪-5‬‬
‫‪-6‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫‪SIMBOX 6.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪ STAB‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﻝ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪،‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﺠﺶ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ(‬ ‫‪-1‬‬

‫‪-2‬‬
‫‪-3‬‬
‫‪-4‬‬
‫‪-5‬‬
‫‪-6‬‬
‫‪-7‬‬
‫‪-8‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-2‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-3‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪) Instabus EIB‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺱ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ instabus‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻴﻒ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-3‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬

‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2-1‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻏﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ) ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ – ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ – ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ – ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ – ﺑﺮﺝ – ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ( ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ) ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ( ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ )ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻳﺪﻳﻨﮓ ) ‪ ،(( grading‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﺥﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪DIN‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ UPS‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ‬
‫‪) VDE 0108 , DIN VDE 0107‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﺣﻞﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻥﻗﻴﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻓﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺎﻕﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪-‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﺣﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2-2‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩﺣﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻴﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2-3‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻋﻤﻼً ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ؛ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺁﺗﺶﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 4‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺰﺍﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ )ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ( ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺎﻕﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Instabus EIB‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ Instabus‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺱ ‪ ، EIB‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ‪(...‬‬

‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ )ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ(‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺜﻼً‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﮔﻲ )ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ )ﺑﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ -‬ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺏ ‪ -‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻢﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﻔﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩﺣﻞ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ 200KW‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ،300KW‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺘﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﻚﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻮﻡﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ‪ 1.5MW‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍﻱ )ﺭﻳﻨﮓ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 1.5MW‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ )ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﻗﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-4‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ‪ ،800KVA‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ) ‪ (h.v.h.b.c.‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ‪ 16KA‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 20KA‬ﺍﺯ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-4‬‬
‫‪ 3-1‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ -‬ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺁﺗﺶﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺁﺗﺶﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﻼً ﭘﻤﭗﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺏﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - 5-1‬ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ‬
‫‪ -5-2‬ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺕ )ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫‪ -5-3‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻖﺗﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪ EDP‬ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫‪..‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ )‪(HD 384.3/IEC 60364-3/DIN VDE 0100-300‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪tλ ≤ 0.15s‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪0.5s ≤ t ≤ 0.5s‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪0.5s ≤ t ≤ 15s‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪t ≥ 15s‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪UPS‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪t ≤ 15s‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪t < 15s t < 1s‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪t < 1s‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺕ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3-2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ‪UPS‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1- 7‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ )ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ( ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ EDP‬ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ‪ UPS‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ‪ UPS‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ) ‪ (RMS‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻦﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ‪ UPS‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻱﭘﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 2.1ln‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪t ≤ 0.02s‬‬
‫‪ 3.0ln‬ﺗﻚﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪t ≤ 0.02s‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 1.5ln‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪t ≤ 5s‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 1.35ln‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪t ≤ 30 s‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻱﭘﺎﺱ ) ‪ ،(SBS‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ‪) SBS‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 1.6‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ(‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻱ ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ‪ UPS‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ EDP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10ms‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪) gL‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ(‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 25‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.02s‬ﻭ ‪ 5s‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ‪ UPS‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ 0.02s‬ﻭ ‪ 5s‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ SBS ) .‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-2‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ‪ UPS‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 0.02s‬ﻭ ‪ ،5s‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪) gL‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1-3-3‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪ ،TN-C‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻓﺰﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺷﻴﻠﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-2‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ UPS‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ "‪"gL‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ UPS‬ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ta‬‬ ‫‪1.5.lnt < 5s‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪3.lnt < 0.02s‬‬
‫‪0.02s‬‬ ‫‪5s‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ta < 0.02s‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ta < 5s‬‬
‫‪25A‬‬ ‫‪>500A‬‬ ‫‪>120A‬‬ ‫‪166A‬‬ ‫‪80A‬‬
‫‪63A‬‬ ‫‪>1300A‬‬ ‫‪>340A‬‬ ‫‪430A‬‬ ‫‪230A‬‬
‫‪100A‬‬ ‫‪>2500A‬‬ ‫‪>560A‬‬ ‫‪830A‬‬ ‫‪370A‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ‪ TN-S‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺸﻌﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ؛ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ‪ TN-S‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ N,PE‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HD 384.5.54‬ﻭ ‪ IEC 60364-5-54‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(1-1-14‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬

‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ )ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ(‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ )ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪(UMZ‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ )‪ .(AMZ‬ﻣﺜﻼً )ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ (I2G‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻳﮕﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،100KA‬ﺩﺭ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ ln‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ( ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ )ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ( ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺩﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺩﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻮﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ(‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻲﺭﻭ ﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ )ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ( ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺡ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ )ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ( ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ‪-1‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺍً ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﻑ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺻﻮﻻً ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺭﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﺯﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ )ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎﺑﻲ( ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭙﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ) ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ( ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﭼﻮﻙ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ( ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ( ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ –ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ) ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ( ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ‪-1‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻠﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪» : 1937‬ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻬﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ )ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ‪Pmax‬ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ )‪ (Pmax‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺏ ﺗﻮﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ )‪ (Pi‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ )‪ (ai‬ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (g‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪Pmax = ∑ ( Pa‬‬
‫‪i i )g‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪i −1‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻳﺎﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Smax = Pmax cos ϕB‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ )‪(ai‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻢﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ :‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻢﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ) ‪ (g‬ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺣﺸﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ .(1-1-5‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-1-2‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (g‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺮﺥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪0.85…0.95 0.7…0.9 0.85…0.95‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻫﻮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0.9…1‬‬ ‫‪0.9…1‬‬
‫ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪0.5…0.85‬‬ ‫‪0.6…0.8‬‬ ‫‪0.6…0.8‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪0.7…1‬‬ ‫‪0.5…1‬‬ ‫‪0.7…1‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪0.1…0.15‬‬ ‫‪0.1…0.2‬‬ ‫‪0.2‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-1-2‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻢﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (g‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ‪ (W/m2) Pm‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ) ‪ (g‬ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ )ﻫﺘﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺌﺎﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ )ﻣﻜﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻨﻮﺑﻲ( ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻓﺎﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺑﺴﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ IEC60909‬ﻭ ‪ DIN VDE 0102‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ )ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ) ‪ ( Ik′′‬ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ) ‪ (ip‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﺋﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ) ‪(Ik‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ‪) l.V.‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ (1KV‬ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ) ‪) (h.V.‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،(1KV‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ibmax ≤ Icn‬‬
‫‪Ipmax ≤ Icm , Ipk‬‬
‫‪Ithmax ≤ Icw , Ithper‬‬
‫‪ Ibmax‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ Ipmax‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ(‬
‫‪ Ithmax‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪ Icn‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ Icm‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ Icw‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Ipk‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﭙﺎﻟﺴﻲ‬
‫‪ Ithper‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺳﻪﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ l.V.‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ TN‬ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﻚﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ) ‪ ( Ik′′‬ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺳﻪﻓﺎﺯ )‪ (ip‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ 20 C‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ )ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ(‪.‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ـ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪K 2 S2‬‬
‫= ‪Iker f‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪ K‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ S‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ )ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‬
‫‪ TN‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺻﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪ (N, PE, PEN‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ IEC 38‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪ IEC 38‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪ IEC 38‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻛﺜﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻀﻮ ‪ CENELEC‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-1-3‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 35KV‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪،2003‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ 230/380V‬ﻭ ‪ 340/400V‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ ‪ 240/400V‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ ‪ ±10%‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ 220 /380V ± 5%‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ ‪ +6%‬ﻭ ‪ -6%‬ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ 230/400V‬ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 220/380V‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-1-4‬ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 400/690V‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺤﺚﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2003‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﺋﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ )ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ 5%‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ‪ 5%‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ 20%‬ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-1-3‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 35KV‬ﻃﺒﻖ ‪IEC 38‬‬
‫‪ ≤ 1000V‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪V 230/400, 277/480, 400/690, 1000‬‬
‫‪ ≤ 35KV‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪3, 6, 10, (15), 20, 35 KV‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-1-4‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺳﻪﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪220/380V‬‬ ‫)‪Umin(V‬‬ ‫)‪Umax(V‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪220 /380 ± 5%‬‬ ‫‪209/360‬‬ ‫‪231/400‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪230 / 400 ± 6%‬‬ ‫‪209/360‬‬ ‫‪245/424‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪220 / 400 ± 10%‬‬ ‫‪209/360‬‬ ‫‪254/440‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ًﻻ ‪ Pn‬ﺑﺎ ‪ ،(Un-5%‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ )ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ 230/400 V‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1-6‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ 110KV‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2003‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 110/20KV‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ( ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ ،110/20K‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ 105%‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 1.65%‬ﻭ ﭘﺲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 20%‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 2%‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ±1%‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ )ﻣﺜﻼً ‪ 35KV ،20KV ،10KV ،6KV‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1-6‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 2%‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪1 ( nu′′‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪u nu′ +‬‬

‫=‪Δ‬‬
‫‪2 100‬‬
‫=‬‫‪u′ uRr cos ϕ + uXr sinϕ‬‬
‫=‬‫‪u′′ uRr sinϕ + uXr cos ϕ‬‬
‫‪ Δu‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ )ﺩﺭﺻﺪ(‬
‫‪ URr‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻫﻤﻲ )ﺩﺭﺻﺪ(‬
‫‪ UXr‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺋﺎﻛﺘﺎﻧﺲ )ﺩﺭﺻﺪ(‬
‫‪ N‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ‬
‫‪ ϕ‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ‪ ،ukr=6%‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ )‪ (S/SrT‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ، cosϕ ≥ 0.8‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4%‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ـ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬

‫ﺩﺭﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ‪) 8%‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 10%‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ ،IEC 38‬ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ )ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ( ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺁﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ ‪ ( ±5%‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﻴﻦﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ )ﺁﻧﭽﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1-6‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻠﻲ )ﻣﺜﻼً ‪DIN VDE‬‬
‫‪ 0100-520‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻛﺸﻲ( ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪4%‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1-7‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺜﻼً ‪ Ukr=4%‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ 6%‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ )ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ UPS‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ـ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ΔSL‬‬
‫≈ ‪Δu‬‬ ‫‪ukr sinϕL‬‬
‫‪SrT‬‬
‫‪ Δu‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ SrT‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ )‪،(kVA‬‬
‫‪ ΔSL‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ )‪،(kVA‬‬
‫‪ Ukr‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ‬
‫‪ ϕL‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ‪ 630kVA‬ﻭ ‪ ukr=6%‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ‪ SrT=3×630kVA=1890kVA‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ΔSL = 500kVA‬‬
‫‪cosϕL 0.85;sin‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪ϕL 0.25‬‬
‫‪ Δu‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪500kVA‬‬
‫≈ ‪Δu‬‬ ‫= ‪6%.0.52‬‬
‫‪0.83%‬‬
‫‪1890kVA‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1-7‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ‪) 1‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ( ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺼﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ UPS‬ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻮ ًﻻ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻻﻣﭗ )‪ (Un‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ U T‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ U e‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫‪ U n‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫‪(U T − U e )100‬‬
‫= ‪∆U‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Un‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ 400/ 230‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 230/133‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 127v‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻭژﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ %97.5‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ‪ %2.5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ %95‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ %5‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ %105‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 12‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 36‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ %10‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ ΔU‬ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ‪ ΔUT‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ ΔUc‬ﺍﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U C = ∆U − ∆U T‬‬ ‫)‪(2‬‬
‫‪ -α‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻲﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ‪ UT‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪∆U T = β (U a Cosε + U p Sinε‬‬ ‫)‪(3‬‬
‫‪ -Ua‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫‪ -Up‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫‪ -β‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Pk‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫= ‪Ua‬‬ ‫‪× 10 2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪(4‬‬
‫‪U p = U −U‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ (KW‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ -PK‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ )ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ )‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ 1-1‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -P‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪KVA -‬‬
‫‪ -Uk‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ %5.5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ )ﺗﻴﭗ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ ( TM‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ﻭ ‪ %6.5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﺎ ‪. 35 KV‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ‪) ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ( ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-2‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮﻱﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ )ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺍﺯ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻮﻙ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ %20‬ﺗﺎ ‪ %30‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ %8‬ﺗﺎ ‪ %12‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺪﻳﻢ ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-3‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،1-3‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0.95‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0.9‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0.85‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻬﺪ ﻛﻮﺩﻙ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0.6‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ )ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ( ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ )ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻛﺘﻴﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ )ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ( ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ 1-1‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ) ‪ (i‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ )‪ ( Cos φ‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ‪ r‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺪﻛﺲﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ (... ،1‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ I‬ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ D‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ‪ R‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1‬ﺷﻤﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ U1‬ﻭ ‪ U2‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆V = V1 − V2 = 2( I1r1 + I 2 r2 + I 3r3 + I 4 r4 ) Cos ϕ‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ n‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆V = 2 Cosϕ ∑ Ir‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪I1 = i1 + i2 + i3 + i4 , I 2 = i2 + i3 + i4 , I 3 = i3 + i4 , I 4 = i4‬‬
‫‪R1 = r1 , R2 = r1 + r2 , R3 = r1 + r2 + r3 , R4 = r1 + r2 + r3 + r4‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆V = 2 Cosϕ ∑ Ir‬‬ ‫)‪(1-5‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ )ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ( ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪∆V f‬‬
‫‪2 Cosϕ‬‬ ‫‪∑ ID‬‬ ‫=‪R‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫)‪(1-5- a‬‬
‫‪γS‬‬ ‫‪γS‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪( m/Ω mm2‬‬ ‫‪/‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪ -γ‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ -S‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪mm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -D‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻂ )ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ( ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ)‪(m‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (1-5-a‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ (V‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ) ‪ (1-5‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪2 ∑ PD‬‬
‫= ‪∆V f‬‬ ‫)‪(1-5-B‬‬
‫‪γ SVf‬‬
‫‪ -p‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ )‪ (W‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪2 × 105 ∑ PD‬‬
‫= ‪∆V f %‬‬ ‫)‪(1-6‬‬
‫‪γ S V f2‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻀﺮﺏ ‪ P.D‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﺋﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ ‪ M‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎً ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 1-6‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(1-6- a‬‬
‫= ‪∆V %‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ‪ C= γVf2/2×105‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ C‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-4‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪C‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻟﻤﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻲ‬
‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪380/220 1‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪380/220 2‬‬
‫‪7.7‬‬ ‫‪12.8‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪220 3‬‬
‫‪6.9‬‬ ‫‪11.4‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪220/127 4‬‬
‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪127 5‬‬
‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪8.6‬‬ ‫ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪127 6‬‬
‫‪1.9‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪110 7‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ -1-4‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (1-6-a‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺪﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:3-1‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 500‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺟﻴﻮﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 2.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-2‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ Cos φ=0.55‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-2‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (1-6-a‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ 1-4‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ C‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 12.8‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪∆V‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫‪∑ M = 12.8 × 2.5 (0.5 × 10 + 0.5 × 16 + 0.5 × 22 + 0.5 × 28) +‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫(‪0.2‬‬ ‫‪(0.5 × 10 + 0.5 × 16 + 0.5 × 22 + 0.5 × 28) = 1.43%‬‬
‫‪12.8 × 2.5‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ -1-3‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺳﻴﻤﻪ )ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ( ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-3‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪= PL + 6 PL = 7 PL‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪= 2 PL + 5PL = 7 PL‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪= 3PL + 4 PL =7 PL‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ -1-3‬ﺷﻤﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ )ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻝ( ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫‪630 400 250 160‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪63‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪KVA‬‬
‫‪7.6‬‬ ‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫‪3.7 2.65 1.97 1.28 0.88 0.60‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ‪KW‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ -1-1‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ)ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ %‬ﺑﺎﺯﺍﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪KVA‬‬
‫‪0.6‬‬ ‫‪0.7‬‬ ‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫‪0.9‬‬ ‫‪1.0‬‬
‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫‪5.7‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3.9‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪4.4‬‬ ‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫‪160-250‬‬
‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫‪6.5‬‬ ‫‪0.6‬‬
‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫‪4.9‬‬ ‫‪6.3‬‬ ‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬
‫‪4.8‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫‪5.4‬‬ ‫‪5.5‬‬ ‫‪6.5‬‬ ‫‪0.6‬‬
‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪6.2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫‪6.4‬‬ ‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫‪630-1000‬‬
‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫‪4.9‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫‪6.6‬‬ ‫‪0.6‬‬
‫‪2.6‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪6.4‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫‪4.8‬‬ ‫‪6.6‬‬ ‫‪0.8‬‬ ‫‪1600‬‬
‫‪4.5‬‬ ‫‪4.6‬‬ ‫‪5.0‬‬ ‫‪5.4‬‬ ‫‪6.8‬‬ ‫‪0.6‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ -1-2‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ %97.5‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ‬

‫‪1.83‬‬ ‫ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1.37‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1.33‬‬ ‫ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1.15‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ -1-5‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪∑M = ∑M‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ‪= ∑ M 3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 1-5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Cosϕ ∑ iD‬‬
‫= ‪∆V f‬‬ ‫)‪(1-7‬‬
‫‪γS‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ )ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ( ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫=‪i‬‬
‫‪3V f Cosϕ‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.33 ∑ PD‬‬
‫= ‪∆V f‬‬ ‫)‪(1-8‬‬
‫‪γ SVf‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.33 × 10 5 ∑ PD‬‬
‫= ‪∆V %‬‬ ‫)‪(1-9‬‬
‫‪γ S V f2‬‬
‫= ‪∆V %‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫)‪(1-9-a‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ‪ C = γV f2 / 0.33 ×10 5‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-4‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪4-1‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:3-2‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-4‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 2.5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ‪ 750‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ 380/220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻞ‪ :‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ A‬ﺗﺎ ‪ B‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 77‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪:(1-4‬‬
‫‪∆V‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪× 0.75 × 20 × 15 = %0.73‬‬
‫‪77 × 4‬‬
‫‪AB‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ C‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ 220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ‪ 12/8‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪∆VBC %‬‬ ‫‪(0.75 × 10 + 0.75 × 16 + 0.75 × 28 + 0.75 × 34) = 2.58%‬‬
‫‪12.8 × 2.5‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪∆VBC %‬‬ ‫‪× 5 × 0.75(10 + 12) = 2.58%‬‬
‫‪12.8 × 2.5‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪∆VBD %‬‬ ‫‪× 4 × 0.75(10 + 13.5) = 2.58%‬‬
‫‪12.8 × 2.5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪∆VBE %‬‬ ‫‪× 6 × 0.75(5 + 15) = 2.82%‬‬
‫‪12.8 × 2.5‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ AE‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪∆V AE = ∆V AB + ∆VBE = %0.73 + %2.82 = %3.55‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ‪ :‬ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-5‬ﻣﻲﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-5‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ‪ I1,I2,I3‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪i0 = i1 + i2 + i3‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ Io‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ )‪ r0‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ(‪:‬‬
‫‪∆ V = i 0 r0 + 1r0 + 2 r0 + i 3 r0‬‬ ‫)‪(1-10‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-6‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ OI‬ﻭ ‪ OII‬ﻭ ‪ OIII‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪ U f ,U f ,U f‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪6-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ O‬ﺗﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ Ó‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U 1 = ∆U f + ∆U 0 Cosα‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪(1-11‬‬
‫‪ - U f‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ - ∆U oCosα‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (1-10‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-6‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬
‫‪∆ U = ∆ U o1 + ∆ U o2 + ∆ U o3‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U 0 Cosα = ∆U 01 − ∆U 02 Cosβ − ∆U 03 Cosγ‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ β = γ = 60 0‬ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪∆U 0 Cosα = ∆U 01 − 0.5(∆U 02 − ∆U 03‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪∆U 1Cosα = ∆U f1 + ∆U 01 − 0.5(∆U 02 − ∆U 03‬‬ ‫)‪(1-11-a‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U 2 = ∆U f 2 + ∆U 02 − 0.5(∆U 01 − ∆U 03 )‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪(1-12‬‬
‫‪∆U 3 = ∆U f3 + ∆U 03 − 0.5(∆U 01 − ∆U 02 ) ‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ∆U f‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ‪ ∆U o‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ )‪:(1-6-a‬‬
‫= ‪∆V f1‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫)‪(1-13‬‬
‫‪CS i‬‬
‫= ‪∆V01‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬
‫‪CS 0‬‬
‫‪ - ∑ M i‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ i‬ﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺯ )‪1‬ﻭ‪2‬ﻭ‪ (3‬ﻭ ‪ – Si‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ‪ i‬ﺍﻡ ﻭ ‪ – S0‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ C = γV‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪،C‬‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ 380/220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 25.6‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪220/127‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 8.5‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 15.5‬ﻭ ‪ 5.2‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:3-3‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-7‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ 380/220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ ∆U = 3%‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪= 1× 100 + 0.5 × 150 + 2 × 200 = 575 KW .M‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪= 1 × 100 + 1 × 150 + 1 × 200 = 450 KW .M‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪= 1 × 100 + 1 × 150 + 0.5 × 200 = 350 KW .M‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪7-1‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 1-13‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪∆U f1‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪575‬‬
‫‪= 3.74%‬‬
‫‪CS1‬‬ ‫‪25.6 × 6‬‬
‫= ‪∆U f 2‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪450‬‬
‫‪= 2.94%‬‬
‫‪CS 2‬‬ ‫‪25.6 × 4‬‬
‫= ‪∆U f3‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪375‬‬
‫‪= 2.44%‬‬
‫‪CS 3‬‬ ‫‪25.6 × 6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (1-13‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪∆U 01‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪575‬‬
‫‪= 5.6%‬‬
‫‪CS 0‬‬ ‫‪25.6 × 4‬‬
‫= ‪∆U o2‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪450‬‬
‫‪= 4.4%‬‬
‫‪CS 0‬‬ ‫‪25.6 × 4‬‬
‫= ‪∆U 03‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪375‬‬
‫‪= 3.68%‬‬
‫‪CS 0‬‬ ‫‪25.6 × 4‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 1-11-a‬ﻭ‪ 1-12‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U1 = ∆U f1 + ∆U 01 − 0.5(∆U 02 − ∆U 03 ) = 3.74 + 5.6 − 0.5(5.4 + 3.68) = 5.26%‬‬
‫‪∆U 2 = ∆U f 2 + ∆U 0 2 − 0.5(∆U 01 − ∆U 0 3 ) = 2.94 + 4.4 − 0.5(5.6 + 3.68) = 2.7%‬‬
‫‪∆U 3 = ∆U f 3 + ∆U 0 3 − 0.5(∆U 01 − ∆U 0 2 ) = 2.44 + 3.68 − 0.5(5.6 + 4.4) = 1.12%‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻼ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U1 = 2.5%‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪∆U 2 = 2.8%‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪∆U 3 = 2.4%‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1-4‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ )ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬

‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻻﻣﭗﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ 1-8‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-8‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-9‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-9‬ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ OI‬ﻭ‪ OII‬ﻭ‪OIII‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺧﻂ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ I0‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ ∆U 0 = I 0 r0‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ )ﻧﻮﻝ( ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ O‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ Ó‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ I0‬ﻭ‪ I1‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻩ‪ 60‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﻪ ‪ I 0 = I1 = I 2‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U1 = ∆U f + ∆U 0Cosα = I1r1 + 0.5 I 0 r0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪(1-14‬‬
‫‪ - ∆U f‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ - ∆U 0Cosα‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ‪ n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 1-14‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆U1 = 1.5∑ Ir = 1.5∑ ir‬‬ ‫)‪(1-14-a‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ )ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ( ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ )‪ (P=2iUf‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.75 ∑ PD‬‬
‫= ‪∆U1‬‬ ‫)‪(1-15‬‬
‫‪γSV f‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.75 × 105 ∑ PD‬‬
‫= ‪∆U %‬‬ ‫)‪(1-16‬‬
‫‪γS V f2‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫= ‪∆U %‬‬
‫‪∑M‬‬ ‫)‪(1-16-a‬‬
‫‪CS‬‬
‫‪ -C‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ C = γV f2 / 0.75 ×10 5‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-4‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (1-16a) ,(1-9a) ,(1-6a‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ، ∑ M‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ )‪ (S‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ C‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ C‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-4‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ (0.5‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1-5‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ‪ (1-10‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻤﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻤﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ‪ -‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻤﻢ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪10-1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬
‫‪∑M + m‬‬
‫‪C∆V‬‬
‫‪ -S‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫‪ - ∑ M‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪KW.M‬‬
‫‪ -m‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1-5‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ -C‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪(1-4‬‬
‫‪ - ∆V‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ )ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ S=10mm2‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺭﺍ ‪ 16mm2‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-10‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ ∆U‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ A-1‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪M A−1 + M 1−2 + M 1−3 + α 4−3 m1−4 + α 4−2 (m2−a + m2− B + m4−e‬‬
‫= ‪S A−1‬‬
‫‪C4U‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ SA-1‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪A-1‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪M A−1‬‬
‫= ‪∆VA−1‬‬
‫‪C4 S A−1‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ 1-2‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪M 1−2 + α 4−2 (m2−a + m2−b‬‬
‫= ‪S1−2‬‬
‫) ‪C4 (∆V − ∆VA−1‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪:1-3‬‬
‫) ‪M 1−3 + α 4−2 (m3−c + m3−d‬‬
‫= ‪S1−3‬‬
‫) ‪C4 (∆V − ∆VA−1‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪:1-4‬‬

‫) ‪M 1−4 + α 3−2 (m4−e + m4− f‬‬
‫= ‪S1−4‬‬
‫) ‪C3 (∆V − ∆VA−1‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪M 2− a‬‬
‫= ‪S 2− a‬‬
‫) ‪C2 (∆V − ∆VA−1 + ∆V1−2‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪M 4 −e‬‬
‫= ‪S 4 −e‬‬
‫) ‪C2 (∆V − ∆VA−1 + ∆V1−4‬‬
‫‪ -1-6‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺭﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻩ ‪65‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺗﺎ ﻩ ‪ 70‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻱ )ﺗﺎ‪ 3‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﻩ ‪ 80‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ )ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ( ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺒﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ )ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ( ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻦﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻻﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪.(1-6‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ In‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪ In/S‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ؟ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪In ≥ I p‬‬ ‫)‪(1-18‬‬
‫‪ -In‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ‪ -Ip‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ )ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﻢ(‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪P × 103‬‬
‫= ‪Ip‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫‪V f .Cosε‬‬
‫‪P × 103‬‬
‫= ‪Ip‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫)‪(1-19‬‬
‫‪2.V f .Cosε‬‬
‫‪P × 103‬‬ ‫‪P.103‬‬
‫= ‪Ip‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫‪3.V f .Cosε‬‬ ‫‪3VL .Cosε‬‬
‫‪ -P‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ‪KW‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ‪ 1-18‬ﺁﺗﺶ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﺍﺧﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻲﻣﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ )ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ )ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ؟(‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺫﻭﺏ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ )‪ (IB‬ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ )‪ (Ia‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪I B ≥ I p ‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪(1-20‬‬
‫‪I a ≥ I p ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪In ≥ IB ‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪(1-21‬‬
‫‪In ≥ Ia ‬‬
‫‪ -B‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺭﺯﺭﻭ )ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ( ﻭ ‪ In‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ‪ Ip‬ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 1-19‬ﻭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪.1-18‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪.1-20‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ‪.1-21‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺫﻭﺏ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪ (IB‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ‪ Ia‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ )ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ (1-6‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ‪ 0/5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ./75‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ 2/5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‪ 4 ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪2/5‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 1/5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ – ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ(‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ – ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ(‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻫﻢﻱﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ )ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﻳﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ( ‪:‬‬
‫)‪r = 9(D+d‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ )ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ( ‪:‬‬
‫)‪r = 8(D+d‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ = r‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ = D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ = d‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ = A‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ‪-1‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ )ﺳﻜﺘﻮﺭ( ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪d = 1.3 A‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫)ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ( ﺱﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ‪35× D ،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ‪20×D ،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ‪ %50‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 20‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺩﻓﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0/7‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺩﻓﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 0/3‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺟﺮ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻫﻢ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﺟﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺟﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﺟﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ‪-1‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﺟﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍ ﺯ ‪ +3‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 72‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ )ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ( ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ +20‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻇﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ‪-2‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ )ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﻫﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﭘﺮﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻟﺤﻴﻢ )ﻗﻠﻊ ﻭ ﺳﺮﺏ( ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﮕﭽﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺯﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻗﻮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 1/3‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ‌‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲ‌ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻥﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻥﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‌ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫‌‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫‌‬ ‫ﺟﻨﺲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‌‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﻴﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫‌‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‌‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‌ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (re‬ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ)‪(rm‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ )ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ( ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (se‬ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ )‪.(sm‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻱﻕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‌ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‌ﺭﻭﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪) P.V.C‬ﭘﻠﻲ ﻭﻱ ﻧﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﺮﺍﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ‌ﺷﻮﺩ‪ P.V.C .‬ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ‌ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ‌ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ‌ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫‌‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ‌‬
‫ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ‪) PET‬ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‌ﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺗﺸﺰﺍ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬‫‌‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‌ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‌‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‌ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬ ‫‌‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ‌ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‌ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﻲ‌ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ‌ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ‌ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ‌ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻴﺰﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻲﻭ ﻡ‬ ‫‌‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﭘﻴﭽﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮ‬ ‫‌‬
‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ‌ﺷﻮﻥﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻠﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻨﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ‌ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻏﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻏﻼﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﻢ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‌‬ ‫ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
‫‌‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‌‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻩ ﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ )ﻏﻼﻑ( ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻦﺱ )ﻣﺲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻻﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻮﻳﮋﻩ ‪ ( PVC‬ﻣﻲﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻧﮓ‌ﺯﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺳﻴﻢ )ﺭﺷﺘﻪ(‪ :‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻮﺷﺸﻲ )ﻋﺎﻳﻖ( ﺍﺣﺎﻃﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺴﻲ )ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻥ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ U 0 / U‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U 0‬ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺍ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ )‪ (r.m.s‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ )ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ )‪ (rms‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ‪ U 0‬ﻭ ‪U‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1/5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ )ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ( ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ HD 516 s 2/DIN VDE 0298 -300‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭﺁﻥ‬
‫‪U 0 /U AC‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ )ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺧﻄﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ U 0 :‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ r.m.s‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ( ﻭ ‪ U‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪r.m.s‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ،AC‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ U‬ﻭ ‪ U 0‬ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ، DC‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1.5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ U 0 /U ≥ 0.6/1 kV‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ ، AC‬ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ AC‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DC‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪450/750 V ≤ U 0 /U‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ 10% -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫‪U 0 /U = 600/1000 V‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪ 20% -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ U 0 /U = 0.6/1 k V‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ AC‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ U b max‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 20%‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ ، AC‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ ، AC‬ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ 125‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪DC‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DC‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ DC‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ AC‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ 1.5‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DC‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ 0.5‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻴﺰ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺷﺮﻁ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ) ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ( ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺗﺎً ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ m=0.7‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪lb ≤ l z = l r .Πf .‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺁﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ < ‪ lb ≤ l z‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ B , C‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﭻ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍً ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-1‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ ) AC‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ ) AC‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ( ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﺸﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ، 2-1‬ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-2‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-1‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪l n‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ) ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪l n = l n .Πf‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-6‬‬ ‫‪ 1-7-2‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪A1, A2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ )‪(A‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ )‪(A2‬‬ ‫‪1-7-8‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )‪(A2‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪B1 , B2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )‪(B1‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )‪(B1‬‬ ‫‪1-7-8‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻓﻴﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ )‪(B2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ )‪(B2‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪1-7-8‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭽﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭽﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪E‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-6‬ﻭ ‪1-7-5‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ) ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫‪1-7-8‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ) ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪C ° 30‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-7‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ 50Hz‬ﺗﺎ ‪60 Hz‬‬
‫‪ (1‬ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺿﺪ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ 0.1 k . m/W‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪(2‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(3‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-2‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪A1 (A‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪A2(A‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪A1 (A‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫‪B1‬‬
‫× ‪ 0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ( ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ‬
‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺯﻛﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ﭼﻮﺑﻲ (‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ‬

‫ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺍﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ﭼﻮﺑﻲ (‬ ‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ﭼﻮﺑﻲ (‬
‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮔﭻ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪2km/w‬‬ ‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮔﭻ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪2k.m/w‬‬
‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ‪ 0.1 km/w‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ (2 .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪DIN VDE 0298-4‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ) 2-2‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ( ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫× ‪ 0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻘﻒ ) ﭼﻮﺑﻲ (‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ × ‪ 0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ‬

‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ) ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ (‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻳﺎ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ) ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺍﺭ ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬

‫‪E (1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬

‫‪E (1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ × ‪ 0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬

‫‪E (1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪E‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ) 2-2‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ( ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫‪5d  V ≤ 1.5d‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪(4 (2 (1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B2‬‬
‫≤ ‪5d 50d  V‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪20d  V ≤ 1.5d‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪(4 (3 (1‬‬
‫‪v ≤ 20d‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪(4‬‬
‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪20d  V ≤ 1.5d‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪(4 (3 ( 1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B2‬‬
‫‪v ≤ 20d‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﺒﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪B2‬‬
‫‪(4‬‬
‫‪5d  V ≤ 1.5d‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﭻ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫≤ ‪5d 50d  V‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪(4 (2 (1 2k.m/w‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﭻ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪(4 2k.m/w‬‬ ‫‪5d V ≤ 1.5d‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B2‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫≤ ‪5d 50d  V‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻘﻒ ‪* ( 2 (1‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻔﺎ ﻛﺎﺫﺏ ‪(2 (1‬‬
‫‪ V‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ V (1‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ 50d‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ C‬ﻳﺎ ‪ E‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺮﺍ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d (2‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ d ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ × 2.2‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ d ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ × 3‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d (3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ( 4‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ) 2-2‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ( ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ‬ ‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ‪(2 (1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪B1‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ‪(1‬‬
‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬

‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ‪(1‬‬ ‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ‬

‫‪(1‬‬ ‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ‪(1‬‬
‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ B1 , B2‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-3‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-9‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ) 2-2‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ( ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪20d  V ≤ 1.5d‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ) ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ( ‪(3 (2‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪B2‬‬
‫‪v ≤ 20d‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻒ ‪(4 (1‬‬
‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ) ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ( ‪(4‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ‬

‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﭻ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2k.m/w‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪(5.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻒ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ B2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ d‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ V ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 16mm‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ ) 2-2‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ( ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫)‪A1(A‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪(1‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﺭﻛﺖ‬ ‫‪B1‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ‬

‫ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﺭﻛﺖ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪B2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﭼﻮﺏ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫)‪A1(A‬‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬ ‫)‪A1(A‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﻑ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪(1‬‬
‫‪(1‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﻳﺎﻧﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ B1‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ B2‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ) ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ (‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ‌ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ‌ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ PVC‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 70‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‌ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻙ‌ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺟﺮ ﻓﺮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‌‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ‪ 30‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ 1/15‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ DIN VDE 0276-1000.‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ I Z‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪ DIN 40200‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ I r‬ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ) ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪ ،( DIN VDE 0276-1000‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫‪I Z = Ir Π f‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ‪ Π f‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪ ، I b‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ ub max‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ kV‬ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ‪ p‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ kW‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫= ‪Ib‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪u b max‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫= ‪lb‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪:A‬‬
‫‪U b max . cos Φ‬‬
‫= ‪lb‬‬
‫‪p‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪:A‬‬
‫‪3U b max . cos Φ‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪ I b‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ ϑ Lr‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ ، 70 C °‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪A1,‬‬
‫‪ A2,B1,B2,C,E‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-3‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 30 C °‬ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ( ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-9‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ ) A1‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ( ﻭ ‪ ) A2‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ( ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-2‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺑﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-3‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ) ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ( ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ I z‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ ) I r‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ( 2-3‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ ) f‬ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-7‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1-7-9‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( DIN VDE 0298-4‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫)‪I Z = I r Πf ( A‬‬
‫‪ IIf‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬

‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺏ ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﻄﺎ ) ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ‪ DIN VDE 0/100‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ‪ 50‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ‪ ، H07-U‬ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫‪ 6mm2‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﻭ ‪ ρ E‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪40‬‬
‫‪ C °‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ) ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ( ‪:‬‬
‫‪70 C °‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫‪40 C °‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ I r‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-6‬‬
‫‪36A‬‬ ‫‪(ϑU = 30  C , n = 3B1‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.87‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻝ ‪1-7-7‬‬
‫‪0.48‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫‪0.417‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ‪Π f‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ I z‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 15.0A‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫× ‪ 2.5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ‪) ،‬ﺩﻭﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪NYM-J 3‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ( ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 1.5 × NYM-J 4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ) ﺳﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ (‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ) ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ (‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ 35 C °‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1.5mm2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫‪n=3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ I r‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪2-3‬‬
‫‪17.5A‬‬ ‫‪(ϑU = 30  C‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.94‬‬ ‫‪0.94‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-7‬‬
‫‪0.68‬‬ ‫‪0.68‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫‪0.64‬‬ ‫‪0.64‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫‪11.2‬‬ ‫‪11.24‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ I z‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫× ‪ 2.5‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 10‬ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪NYM-J 10‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ 40 C °‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ I r‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪2-3‬‬
‫‪36A‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(ϑU = 30  C , n = 3‬‬

‫‪0.87‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻝ ‪1-7-7‬‬
‫‪0. 55‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫‪0.4 8‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ‪Π f‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 10‬ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺸﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪10‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ I z‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 9.6A‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪ U n =400 V‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 60 kva‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 6‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NYBUY‬ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻙ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ‪ 45 C‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ؟‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ 60 KVA‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪60 × 10 3‬‬
‫= ‪lb‬‬ ‫‪= 86.6 A‬‬
‫‪3 × 400v‬‬
‫‪0.7 9‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻝ ‪1-7-7‬‬
‫‪0. 79‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫‪0. 6‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ‪Πf‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-1‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ( ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‬
‫‪86.6 A‬‬
‫= ‪lbf‬‬ ‫‪= 139.7 A‬‬
‫‪0.62‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 6‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 23.3 A‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2 .5mm‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-3‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ )‪ (E‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ 25A‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ × NYBUY-j4‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-7‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪30 C °‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪PVC‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪70 C °‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪1.22‬‬
‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1.17‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪1.12‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪1.06‬‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪0.94‬‬
‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬
‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪0.79‬‬
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪0.71‬‬
‫‪55‬‬ ‫‪0.61‬‬
‫‪60‬‬ ‫‪0.50‬‬
‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪1.35‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-8‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪10mm2‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪0.75‬‬
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪0.65‬‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪0.55‬‬
‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪0.50‬‬
‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪0.45‬‬
‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪0.40‬‬
‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪0.35‬‬
‫‪61‬‬ ‫‪0.30‬‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻃﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ ‪ V.D.E‬ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ N‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ‬
‫‪ NR‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ T‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ R‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ Y‬ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ R‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ E‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ M‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ S‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ‬
‫‪(0/6 / 1kv) NYY‬‬ ‫‪3*50+ 25 sm‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﻮﺩﻭﺭ ) ‪ (pvc‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 0/6‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺧﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪-400-300-240-185-150-120-95-70-50-35-25-16-10-6-4 - 2.5 - 1.5 - 1 - 0.75 - 0.5‬‬
‫‪500‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 2*4‬ﻛﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ‪ 16‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3*35+16‬‬ ‫‪3*25+10‬‬ ‫‪4*16‬‬ ‫‪4*10‬‬ ‫‪4*6‬‬ ‫‪4*4 4*2.5‬‬ ‫‪4*1.5‬‬

‫‪3*240+120‬‬ ‫‪3*180+95‬‬ ‫‪3*150+70 3*120+70 3*50+25‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 3*25+10‬ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ‌‬

‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎ ‪30 kV‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎﻳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ) ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ – ﺗﺮﻣﻮﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ (‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ) ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻱ (‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ – ﺗﺮﻣﻮﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ -‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪U‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪VDE‬‬
‫ﺩ ‪ -‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ) 10mm‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺠﺶ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ( ‪ .‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-11‬ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ )‪ (PE‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ( ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ PVC‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭژﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺮﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﻣﺜﻞ‪،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻼﺏ ﻭ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ (‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-11‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ≥ ‪0.6/1 kV‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺭﻧﺠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ‪E30/E90‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪0.61/1 kV ‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ‪PVC‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ‪PE‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ = PROTODUR -‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ) PVC‬ﭘﻠﻲ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﺮﺍﻳﺪ (‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ – ‪ = PROTOTHEN X‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ) XLPE‬ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ ‪( crosslink‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ U 0 / U ≤ 0.6 / 1kV u n :‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ u n‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ u n‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪u0‬‬
‫( ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪ U b‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ)‬
‫‪u b max‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ u b max‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ (‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ r.m.s‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪u0‬‬ ‫‪u0‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ U 0‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ‪ U‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ U = 3.U 0 :‬ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ) ‪ ( U m‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ U m‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪r.m.s‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ = 1.2 U U m‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-16‬ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1-7-16‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻳﻤﭙﺎﻟﺴﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ) ‪ ( U rb‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ U rb‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ) ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ( ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫≤ ‪u b max‬‬ ‫‪um‬‬ ‫‪um ≤ u0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 0.6/1kV‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺯﻳﺮﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DC‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪ U b max‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1.8KV‬ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ U b max = 3.6 kV‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪240 mm‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺯﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻫﻠﻲ ﻭﻧﻴﺰ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ‪ 1-2-13‬ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪-‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ :‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ؛‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ؛‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ :‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﻻ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪-‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻬﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭﺣﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ؛‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻭﺣﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ؛‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ؛‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ؛‬
‫ﺝ‪-‬ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪-‬ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 1‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺳﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ؛‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ؛‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ؛‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﻱ –ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺫﻛﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 2‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ؛ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ؛‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻫﻠﻲ ؛‬

‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ؛‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 3‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ )ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ( ؛‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ؛‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ؛‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻛﻢ ﻭﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 4‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 5‬ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﻬﺎ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 6‬ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 7‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺰﺍءﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪،‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ؛‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ؛‬
‫ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ؛‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ؛ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﻇﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ) ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ – ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ (‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ 3-2-9‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ) ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ‪ ) .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﻓﺖ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺱ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ) ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﺰﺭگ ( ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻒ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ×0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ×2‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ) ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻙ ﻫﺎ ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 30 cm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺷﻌﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻒ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ 0.95‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ‪ 30 C °‬ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ :‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ) ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-7‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﻮﺷﺸﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪ HD384.5.52/DIN VDE 0/00-520‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻒ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ( 1-7-1‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ )‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻤﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﭻ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺞ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪( 1-7-2‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ -5‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪DIN VDE 0605 , AS‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ) ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ( HYDROFIRM‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻇﺐ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺩﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ 70‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺩﺍﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻙ ﻧﺮﻡ )ﺍﻟﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 20‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺟﺮ )ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﺟﺮ( ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﻳﺨﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻛﻨﺪﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻨﮓ ﺻﺪﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺷﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭼﺴﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺦ ﻗﻼﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﭻ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺧﻴﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ 1-7-10‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ) ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ . ( HD 5/6 s2 /DIN VDE 0298-300‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻟﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﺘﻴﻦ ) ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ . ( 1-7-3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ( ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻳﺎﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻭﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ :(DIN 47705) NYM‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ� ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ ،(H.F.‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪F0‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ :(DIN 47707) NYRUZY‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NYM‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺯﺭﻩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ :(DIN 47708) NYBUY‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NYM‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﭻ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪: NHYRUZY‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪،‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪1.Filling compound‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﻩ ﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ :YTY‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻜﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬‬
‫ﺳﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ )ﺑﮕﺴﻞ( ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ )ﺑﮕﺴﻞ( ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ‪ 1-1-2-7‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 6-7‬ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻋﻴﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺨﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ )‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍ ﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1/5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻫﺪﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﺷﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺫﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﺩﺗﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻭ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﺞ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫چ‪ -‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺧﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ )ﺯﺭﻩ‪-‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ‪-‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ( )‪r=9(D+d‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺁﻟﻤﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ‪r=15D‬‬
‫‪-‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﻲ ‪r=5D‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ )‪r=8(D+d‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ =D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ =d ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ =r ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫�‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ A‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻡ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪A d=1/3،‬‬
‫‪F1‬‬
‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺳﻘﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺋﻮﭼﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺛﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺋﻴﺌﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﺭﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‬
‫‪20D‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﺭﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺍﺭ ‪35D‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2- Sector‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻛﺎﺫﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻛﺎﺫﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻳﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )ﻳﺎ ﺳﻘﻒ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ )ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻋﻴﻨﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺠﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺁﻫﻦ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻛﻬﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 1/5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻭﻳﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺳﻴﻨﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ‪ 1/5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻭﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻴﺮ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﻱ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ� ﺑﻪ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪F2‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻧﺎﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺁﻱ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻱ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ‬
‫‪3-Eye bolt‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﭽﻪ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻱ ﺑﻮﻟﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻴﺮ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﺭﻛﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﺭﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ‪40D‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﺭﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺍﺭ‪70D‬‬
‫‪ D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ )‪ ،(Shaft‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ‪:(VDE 0271) NAYY, NYY‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ NYY‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NAYY‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻟﻤﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ‪ 0.6/1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﻤﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﻲ )ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ( ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪:(VDE 0271) NAYCWY, NYCWY, NYCY‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NYY‬ﻭ ‪ NAYY‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻼﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NAYFGY, NYFGY, NAYRGY, NYRGY‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪ 0.6/1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ ‪(VDE 0271, IEC‬‬
‫)‪502‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NYRGY‬ﻭ ‪ NYFGY‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NAYRGY‬ﻭ ‪ NAYFGY‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ NYRGY‬ﻭ ‪ NAYRGY‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺯﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ (XLPE‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪0.6/1‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ )‪(IEC 502‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 2XY‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻪ ﻓﻮﺑﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ 250‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪: 2XFGY, 2XRGY‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 2XRGY‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 2XFGY‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻞ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺗﺨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ‪ 250‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪ 0.6/1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪NAKBA, NKBA‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NKBA‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NAKBA‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NAKLEY‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻏﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺘﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪6-7‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺎﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ( ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﻜﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺨﺖ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻝ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻧﻤﺮﻩ ‪ 4‬ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪-7‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (P.V.C‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﻓﻞ ‪72‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮﺱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ‪.‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ -30‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ )ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ( ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺠﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1/5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﺷﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫چ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﺩﺗﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻭ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﻥ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺥ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 4-7‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺧﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺃﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺗﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ )ﺯﺭﻩ‪ -‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ‪ -‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ( )‪r=9(D+d‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ‪r=15D‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﻲ ‪r=5D‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ )‪r=8(D+d‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ =d ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ‪ r‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻡ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ )‪ (Sector‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪A d=1.3‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭ‪ -‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺣﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻭ ﻛﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ‪10‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ))ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ(( ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺁﺟﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺰﺽ ‪ 22‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﭼﻴﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻛﺮﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺬﺍﻟﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 70‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ )ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺟﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﺟﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-7‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ )ﺩﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ( ﺣﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ‪(1-7‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺻﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺯﺑﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺨﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 1/5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫چ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺭﻩ ﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺫﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NYY‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NYCY‬ﻳﺎ ‪ NYCWY‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ )ﺁﺟﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ( ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻓﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪﻭﻛﺎﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺥ‪ -‬ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻇﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻟﻄﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻔﺎﻟﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﮔﻮﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻮﺩﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 0/3‬ﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻐﺰﺵ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺩﺍﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﻔﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻇﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻜﺸﻲ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﻔﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻜﺸﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺭﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺟﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺁﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻒ ﺷﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﻀﻼﺏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺁﺏ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺁﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺷﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﻒ ﺷﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺗﻜﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﻧﺎﻭﺩﺍﻧﻲ )ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺗﻜﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺁﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﭙﺎﻧﺠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﻧﺎﻭﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ )ﺍﺯ ﻛﻒ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻘﻒ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ( ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻜﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﺎﻫﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻭﺩﺍﻧﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻜﺸﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻬﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺥ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﺩﻡ ﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ A‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻭ ‪ D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻬﺮ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﻀﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪:(VDE 0265) NYKY‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻣﺴﻠﺢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ‪TGKT, TGK‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪ 450/750‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ‬
‫‪ EPR‬ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺸﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ TGKT‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺁﺷﺎﻣﻴﺪﻧﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﻲ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﻩ ﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪(VDE 0265) NYKY‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻏﻼﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻧﻔﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪(VDE 0271) NYCY‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ NYY‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻏﻼﻑ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺯﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﺎﻕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ)‪(IEC 245-3‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺸﻢ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪6-7‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺮﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺤﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﺤﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺭﺟﺤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﺤﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻟﺤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﺤﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺮﻕ )‪ %30‬ﺳﺮﺏ‪ %70 ،‬ﻗﻠﻊ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺯ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ) ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻏﻨﻲ( ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺤﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻤﻎ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﭘﺮﻭﺗﻮﻟﻴﻦ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ﭘﻲ‪-‬ﻭﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻲ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ )ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻏﻼﻓﻪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ )ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ( ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺭﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﺒﺖ ﻭﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﭼﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 7-7‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 8-7‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ PVC‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-5‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ XLPE‬ﭘﺮﻭﺗﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ C ° 90‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-8‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-4‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ) ‪ ( A1,A2,B1,B2,C,E‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-5‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ، 1-7-18‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ، XLPE‬ﭘﺮﻭﺗﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻙ ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ N2XY‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ 90 C °‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪6‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ N2* Y4* 35 RM‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ I b = 100 A‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ N2* Y4* 6 RM‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ I b = 40 A‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ N2* Y4* 2.5 RM‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ I b = 20 A‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻙ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﮔﺘﺮ ‪225 mm‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 35 C °‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪0.96‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-19‬‬
‫‪0.70‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪1-7-9‬‬
‫‪0.67‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ‪∏ f‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ، 1-7-18‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ E‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪N2* Y4* 35 RM‬‬ ‫‪I b = 158 A→ Iz 105.9 A > I r‬‬
‫‪I b = 54 A→ Iz = 36.2 A > I r‬‬ ‫‪N2* Y4* 6 RE‬‬
‫‪N2* Y4* 2.5 RM‬‬ ‫‪I b = 32 A→ Iz = 21.4 A > I r‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 2.5mm , 35 mm‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ N2* Y4* 6 RE‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4* 10 RM‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ =‬
‫‪ I r 75 A→ I z = 50.3 A‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-19‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪C ° 30‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪90 .c‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪1.15‬‬
‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪1.12‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪1.08‬‬
‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪1.04‬‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪1.00‬‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪0.91‬‬
‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪0.96‬‬
‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬
‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪0.82‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪: 2‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻻﻣﭗ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻛﺎﺫﺏ ) ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ (30cm‬ﻣﻠﺰﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ) ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ( N2XH SIENOPYR‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ 90 C °‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ 5 KW‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ‪ 400 V‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 35 C °‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-18‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ B1‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ‪ 30 cm‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ d‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ 1-7-18‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪30 C °‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ 0.96 , 35 C °‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ 5 kw , AC‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫= ‪Ib‬‬ ‫‪5000 w‬‬

‫‪400 v / 3‬‬ ‫‪= 21. 7 A‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ C ° = 30‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪I= 21. 7 A/0.96= 22.6 A‬‬
‫‪ I r‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪=23A‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-18‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 1.5 mm‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ N2XH‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ N2XH 3 * 1.5 SIENOPYR‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 5 kw‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ( ﺁﻥ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ m = 0 . 7‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ 0.7 m‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ (‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ f2 , f1‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺧﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺟﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻩ‪ -‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪SE= 20 C ° :‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻙ ﻧﻤﻨﺎﻙ ‪ PE = 1. 0K . m / w :‬ﻭ = ﺧﺸﻚ ‪ Px = 2.5k. m/w :‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺷﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ C ° 25‬ﻭ ‪ 1 k.m/w‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺗﺮ ) ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ( ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ XLPE‬ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺸﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ 2.5.K.m/W‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺳﻨﮓ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻐﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻗﻠﻮﻩ ﺳﻨﮓ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ) ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ( ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ f2 , f1‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ) ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ) ‪ ( 1.2 m – 0.7 m‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪20 C °‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ‪1 k . m / w‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺩﺭﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‪،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ‪ /‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ( ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺁﺟﺮ ﭼﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻛﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ) ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ( ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪: 3‬‬
‫■ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ :‬ﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ SM 3 . 6/6 KV NYFGY3 * 185‬ﭘﺮﻭ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪70 C °‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫‪7cm‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ‪ :‬ﺁﺟﺮ‬
‫‪0.7 m‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫‪1.5K.m/w‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ‪ ) ρ E‬ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ (‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪395 A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ Ir‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 18-7‬ﻭ ) ‪( 1‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬ ‫‪ f1 -‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 18-14‬ﻭ ) ‪( 1‬‬
‫‪0.77‬‬ ‫‪ f2 -‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 18-18‬ﻭ ) ‪( 1‬‬
‫‪1.00‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ‪ :‬ﺁﺟﺮ‬

‫‪0.62‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ‪∏ f‬‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪I Z = 3. 395 A . 062= 735‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫=‪S‬‬ ‫‪3 . u . I = 3 .6KV.735 = 7.64 MVA‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪90 C °‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫‪7 cm‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ‪ :‬ﺁﺟﺮ‬
‫‪1.0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪m‬‬
‫‪1.5 m/w‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ) ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ (‬
‫‪20 C °‬‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ 5 MVA‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪5MVA‬‬
‫= ‪Ib‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪=289A‬‬
‫‪3.U‬‬ ‫‪3.10 KV‬‬
‫‪pE‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪0.86‬‬ ‫‪ f1‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 18-14‬ﻭ ) ‪( 1‬‬
‫‪0.72‬‬ ‫‪ f2‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 18 -18‬ﻭ ) ‪( 1‬‬

‫‪1.00‬‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ‪ :‬ﺁﺟﺮ‬
‫‪0.62‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ‪∏ f‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ‪ I b f‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪289‬‬
‫= ‪Ib f‬‬ ‫‪= 233A‬‬
‫‪2.062‬‬
‫*‪N2*S2Y1‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 18-7‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬

‫‪ 70 RM/16. 6/10 KV‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺲ‪ 70mm2،‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ)ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ( ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ I r =268A‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ‪ 233A‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-20‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪NYFGY‬‬ ‫‪NYCWY‬‬ ‫‪NEKEBA‬‬ ‫‪NA2*Y‬‬
‫‪UO/U‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪3*120 SM‬‬ ‫‪4*240 SM‬‬ ‫‪3*95 RM‬‬ ‫‪4*95 SE‬‬
‫‪KV‬‬ ‫‪3.6/6‬‬ ‫‪0.6/1‬‬ ‫‪12/20‬‬ ‫‪0.6/1‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪6 175‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪m= 1.0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ‪A.lb‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬ ‫‪320‬‬ ‫‪200‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪Su= 40 .c‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪A. lr‬‬ ‫‪274‬‬ ‫‪443‬‬ ‫‪243‬‬ ‫‪308‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ) ‪( 1‬‬ ‫‪18.8‬‬ ‫‪18.6‬‬ ‫‪18.10‬‬ ‫‪18.6‬‬
‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪90‬‬

‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪.c , sL‬‬
‫‪Lb/lr‬‬ ‫‪0.73‬‬ ‫‪0.72‬‬ ‫‪0.72‬‬ ‫‪0.65‬‬
‫‪ 18-19‬ﺍﺯ ‪fH fg 1‬‬ ‫‪ fg‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬ ‫‪0.87‬‬ ‫‪0.85‬‬ ‫‪0.91‬‬

‫)‪(Fh=0.91‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪0.79‬‬ ‫‪0.79‬‬ ‫‪0.77‬‬ ‫‪0.83‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ( ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ) ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ( ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 30 cm‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪-4‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2.0 m‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 80cm- 60 cm‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ 30 cm‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ 50 cm‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ : 1-7-6‬ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ I r‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ) ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ( ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ :‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍً ‪ 30 %‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ fH‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ 18-20‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 18-23‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ fg‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ I r‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Ib‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪Ib‬‬
‫‪≤ Πf = fh. fg‬‬
‫‪Ir‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪FH = FHh .FHV :‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ‪ FHV =0.95‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ‪ =0.93 FHV‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺶ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ‪ FHV =0. 90‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ FHh .FHV‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ‪ FHV‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-7 -7 -b‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻫﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﻭ‬ ‫∑ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻞ ‪P′‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ∆g co‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ΣΡ.1‬‬
‫=‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫‪c p .∆ g co‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫(‬

‫‪ ∑ P′= ∑ Pi′+ Pd′‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫)‬
‫‪ Pd‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ cp‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ CP=1.3 kg/km3‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ‪ v‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫=‪U‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 5 m/5‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ ،ϑ Lr‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ∂ ‪ϑ‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ) ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ( ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆ ϑco ≤ ϑLr − ϑa − ∆ϑL‬‬
‫‪lb 2‬‬ ‫‪lb‬‬

‫( ‪∆ϑL = ∆ϑr‬‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ‪) = (ϑLr − 30C °)( ) 2‬‬
‫‪Ir‬‬ ‫‪Ir‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ FH‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-21‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ m‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 1.5m .2.2m‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 8h‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 16 h‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ C ° 35‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-7-8‬ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 5‬ﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺭﺍﻙ ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ FH ≈0.91‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ r.m.s‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-21‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫‪I 2.t‬‬
‫= ‪la‬‬ ‫‪b1 1 = 205 A. 8h = 118 A‬‬
‫‪t +t‬‬ ‫‪24h‬‬
‫‪1 2‬‬
‫‪power cables and‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ )‬
‫‪ ( their Applicatiom‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪: 1-7-21‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪p ′ = 3I‬‬ ‫‪′ =3.(118 A)2.0.151Ω / m = 6.31w / m‬‬
‫‪. Rw‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪∑ p =14.6.31=88.3w / m‬‬

‫‪1-7-21‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫َ‬
‫‪∑ p = 88.3 + 43.3 + 27.2 + 34.9 = 193.7 w / m‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ : 1-7-6‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪∆ϑ L‬‬ ‫‪70 − 47‬‬

‫= ‪fϑ‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 0.76.‬‬
‫‪∆ϑ r‬‬ ‫‪70 − 30‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ l b / l r‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ fg. fH‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺾ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-7-21‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪205‬‬
‫( ‪∆ ϑ L = 40 K‬‬ ‫‪)2 = 17.2 K .‬‬
‫‪313‬‬
‫‪∆ ϑ co ≤ 70 − 35 − 17.21 ≤ 8k .‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ‪ 16‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪16h‬‬
‫‪I q = 205 A. 24h = 167 A‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫َ‬
‫‪P = 3 × (167 A)2.0151Ω / Km = 12.6w / m.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻓﺰﺍﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺶ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﭻ ) ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ) ‪(AS‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﭻ ) ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ » ‪. ( « A‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﭻ ) ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ » ‪. ( « B‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎ ) ﻋﻼﻣﺖ » ‪. ( « C‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺿﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ )ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ » ‪. ( « F‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎ ‪ 105 .C‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ) ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ » ‪( « 105‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻼً ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ) ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪ ( H07V‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻣﺎ ) ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ( ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ) ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻠﻲ ﭘﺮﻭﭘﻴﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﺖ ﺗﻚ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪-19‬‬
‫‪-1-7‬ﺗﺎ ‪. ( 1-7-21‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺭﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻣﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻛﻮ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ ‪ :‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻛﺎﺫﺏ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ PVC‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ . ( 1-7-22‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 1-7-23‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1-7-31‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ PVC‬ﺳﺨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ( 1-7-32‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺗﻴﺸﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻴﻒ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼً ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪( 1-7-33‬‬
‫‪ ( 1-7-34‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﻧﻴﺰﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻭﺍﺭ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ) ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ( 1-7 – 35‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ‪ :‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ . ( 1-7-36‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺧﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ )ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ (5 1-4-3‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﻢ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻭﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎ( ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫) ‪( 1-7-37‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﭻ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻱ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 750‬ﻭﻟﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ PVC‬ﺗﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 450-750‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ PVC‬ﺗﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 450-750‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ‪ PVC‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 0.6-1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻚ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ‪ ، PVC‬ﻣﺲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 0.6-1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺷﻴﻠﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ‪ PVC‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 0.6-1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻑ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺮﺑﺪﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻴﻠﺪﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ‪ ، PVC‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 0.6-1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 1000‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺮﺑﺪﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺷﻴﻠﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻚ ﻻ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ‪ ، PVC‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 0.6-1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺴﺘﻬﺎ ) ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎً ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ‪ ، PVC‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 300-500‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ 500‬ﻭﻟﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ )‪( AAC‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻛﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺨﺖ ) ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻴﻞ ( ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

‫ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ( ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ )‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ –ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ( ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ )ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪157‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺩﺭﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﻧﻈﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺰﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻭﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﺭﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﭼﻪ ﺩ ﺭﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ؛‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺠﻮﻣﻲ ؛‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻧﺎﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ؛‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻴﻜﻬﺎ ؛‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭﺑﺮﭘﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭼﻨﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻭﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻥﻱﺍﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺤﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻏﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺸﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ EN 60269/IEC 60269/ DIN VDE 0636‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻭ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (plug-in‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ )ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ (I.v.h.b.c‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻧﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ )ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪D‬ﻭ‪ (DO‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﻭ ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪) I.v.h.b.c‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ( ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪) I.v.h.b.c‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-1-1‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.h.b.c‬ﻭ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I .v.b.h.c‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺱﺕﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺍﺯ ﺍپﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ)ﺷﻜﻞ‪ .(4-1-2‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﻙ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.bh.c‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DIN‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪) DIN EN 50022‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-1-4‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-1-5‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺳﺮﺍﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺳﺮﺍﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪).‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪. (4-1-6‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ‬
‫‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻜﺶ ﭼﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ) ‪3،4،2،1،0،00،00،0‬ﻭ‪(4a‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 2A‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 1250A‬ﺑﺎﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪) 500V AC‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ (4-1-1‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪2A‬ﻭ ‪ 500A‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ )‪(00،1،2،3،000‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺁﺗﻲ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‪ 000/00‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ I.v.b.h.c‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪250 V DC‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4a‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 440 V DC‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪(DIAZED) D‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ D‬ﻳﺎ ‪) DIAZED‬ﺷﻜﻞ‪(4-1-7‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻐﺰﻱ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ DIAZED‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻐﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DIAZED‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺰﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DIAZED‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﻥﺻﺐ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DIN‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪) DIN EN 50022‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ( 35mm‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻐﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻡﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻣﻐﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-1-2‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ DIAZED‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪2A‬ﻭ‪ 100A‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 500V AC‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ )‪) ( DIV،D III، D II،NDZ‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ (4-1-3‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ D III‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪2A‬ﻭ‪ 63A‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪690V AC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 600V DC‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺷﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ D III DIAZED‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ D II‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ NDZ‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ‪ E12‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 2A‬ﺗﺎ‪ 25A‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 500 V AC /DC‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪NEOZED DO‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DO‬ﻳﺎ‪) NEOZED‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-1-8‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ DIAZED‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ 18mm‬ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻳﻞ ‪ DIN‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪D01‬ﻭ ‪ D02 NEOZED‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1.5) 27mm‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﻻﺭ ( ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ 1.5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ <‪>N‬‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ‪ (4-1-9‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ D03‬ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 45mm‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﺦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 2.5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫<‪ >N‬ﺗﻚ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ >N< NEOZED‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻛﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ >N< NEOZED‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ٍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ SIMBOX 63‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2A‬ﻭ‪100A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ‪400 V AC‬ﻭ ‪ 450 V AC‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ )‪ (D03 ، D02، D01‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪VBG 4 NEOZED‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ VBG 4‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﻤﻦ ﺑﻴﻤﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ)‪( VBG‬‬
‫ﺁﻟﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺵﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ DIN 43880‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ‪ MINIZED >N<D02‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ VBG 4 MINIZED‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ‪ ، IP 20‬ﺑﻮﺵ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪D01‬ﻭ ‪ D02‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻚ ﭘﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪).‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-1-10‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻓﻨﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻱﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ ‪+/-‬‬
‫)ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ(ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 35mm‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪63A‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ)ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DIN EN 50022‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﺟﻔﺖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪D01‬ﻭ ‪ D02‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻚ ﭘﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ 400V DC‬ﻭ ‪ 250 V DC‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 440 V DC‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺸﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪2A‬ﻭ‪ 63A‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪70mm‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ‪1.5 ) 27mm‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﻻﺭ(ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻃﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ‪ >N<D01‬ﻭ‪D02‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ <‪ >N‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪NEOZED‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ‪ >N< NEOZED‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻳﺴﻚ ﺍﺳﻴﺐ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ، 16A‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 50KA‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ‪18mm‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫‪ >N<D01 MINIZED‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) 18mm‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﻻﺭ ( ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ neozed‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 2A‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 16A‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺵﺗﺒﺎﻩ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-1-11‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫‪>N< D01‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫‪ MINIZED‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ‪ >N< D02 MINIZED‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ‪>N< D02 MINIZED‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺷﻜﻞ‪ .(4-1-12‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 27mm‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ‪ >N< D02 MINIZED‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ 55mm‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ N‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ‪27mm‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ D01‬ﻭ‪ D02‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 12mm×5mm‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ‪ 40mm‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ‪ >N< D02 MINIZED‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪NEOZED‬‬
‫‪ 20A D02‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 63A‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻐﺰﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 2A D01 NEOZED‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 16A‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻳﻞ ‪ DIN‬ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ NEOZED‬ﻭ ‪ DIAZED‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪DIN‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪ DIN EN 50022‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ( ‪،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ؛ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ)ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ، (4-1-13‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪) 8.5 × 31.5‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ mm‬ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 58 :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪51 ، 22× 58 :‬‬
‫×‪10×38 ، 14‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ‪) 18mm‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﻻﺭ(ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ)ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ .(4-1-5‬ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻞ ﺑﺎ ‪ N‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﭘﻞ‪،‬ﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﺑﺎ ‪ N‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 4-1-6‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﺎﻓﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 70 K‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﻖ ‪ ، HD 630.2.1 S2/ IEC 60269-2-1‬ﻣﻐﺰﻳﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﻼﺭﻳﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺮﺩﺩﻛﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻣﻦ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﺮﺩ‪ -/+‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪14×51‬ﻭ ‪ 22×58‬ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻀﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ (‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DIN‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 175mm‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﺭﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ DIN‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪IEC , NF C63 210,EN 60269-2, IEC 60269-2-1, 60269-2‬ﻭ ‪NBN‬‬
‫‪ c63269-2, C 60200, C63 211‬ﻭ ‪ 1-2‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺘﺎﻟﻴﺎ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺗﻐﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻠﮋﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺩﻩ ‪g G‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﺞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺩﻩ ‪ a M‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ)ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ (ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺷﻜﻞ‪ .(4-1-14‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺷﻦ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ )ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ( ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺮﻳﺞ ﺳﺮﺍﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 6A‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 8A‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺑﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻘﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻩ ‪ gG‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﮔﻠﻮﮔﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ 4-1-6 ، 4-1-5‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻡﺵﺧﺼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ /‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-1-15‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﻔﺎ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺷﻦ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ( ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ )ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪-17b ،4-1-17a ،4-1-13‬‬
‫‪ (4-1-23، 4-1-22، 4-1-17C ، 4-1‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،.‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﺯﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪/‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ 10‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ -+10 %‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪EN ) .‬‬
‫‪ .( 60269/ IEC 60269/ DIN VDE 0636‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﻤﻨﺲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ‪-+ 5 %‬‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻨﺪ‪).‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(4-1-18‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪).‬ﺷﻜﻞ‪(4-1-19‬‬
‫‪) 1: 1.6‬ﻣﺜﻼ ‪(63 A 100A‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻴﻮﻳﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ)ﺷﻜﻞ‪(4-1-20‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻘﺺ ) ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ( ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪) .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ( ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﻮﺩﮔﻲ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ)ﺳﻠﻔﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻩ‪ -‬ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ( ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺴﻚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 100w‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻳﺴﻚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺗﺲ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ DIN VDE‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ )ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ( ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 0.5A‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 0.3A‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-1-39‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ IISO‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ‪) Piso‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ (4-1-15‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﻘﺺ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‪ I<= 0.3A‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺍﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ‪ n‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪ Ia‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ‪ T‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺶ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪TN‬ﻳﺎ‪ TT‬ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﺧﻂ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﭽﻴﻨﮓ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻮﻳﭽﻴﻨﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-2-2‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ‪8‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ 10ms‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-2-3‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ p.f.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ( ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-2-4‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ p.f.‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ L/N‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ )ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 13‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ( ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-5‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ p.f.‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﻭ ﻗﻠﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ p.f.‬ﺍﺳﺖ)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(4-2-6‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 24V‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 30V‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-2-7‬ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ½ ‪ 1‬ﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺝ‬
‫)‪(30mm‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻨﺪﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(4-2-8‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )‪(30mm‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﻢ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ :‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪3 mm‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪3mm‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪:‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪. 3mm‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﭼﺎﭘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‪:‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪0.5‬‬
‫‪ . mm‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ‪) AC-1‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻑﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫(ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ p.f .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ 16A‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ 5TT3 081‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ 20A‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ )ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪-2‬‬
‫‪(4-2‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪16A‬ﻭ ‪32A‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪1 MU‬ﻭ ‪) 2MU‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(4-2-11‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪40A‬ﻭ ‪ 125A‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 1 MU‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-2-12‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﻪ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ‪ 63A‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-13‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 690V‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ 100A‬ﺗﺎ‪ 200A‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪100A‬ﻭ ‪ 125A‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﻫﻤﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ‪finger‬‬
‫‪ – grip knob‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 8mm‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ‪NO‬‬
‫ﻃﻴﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ)ﺷﻜﻞ‪(4-2-14‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺎﺗﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪6A‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ‪(4-2-15‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 16A‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ )‪ 1C‬ﻳﺎ ‪1(2C‬ﻳﺎ ‪ . 2MU‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪(1 NO) NO‬ﻭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﭘﻴﻠﻮﺕ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ‪ 230V‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ‪5m‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ ، 150m‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ، 1MU:‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ ‪:‬ﻃﻮﺳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-2-16‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ) ‪1 NO‬ﻳﺎ‬

‫‪(2NO‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ : 1MU :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﻃﻮﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ 1 NO‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪(1NO + 1NC) NC‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﺳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺑﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) 1MU‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-2-17‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ NO‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪1 NC ) NC‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( 1NO‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﻮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻠﻮﺕ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ‪ 230V‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪5m‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 150m‬ﻋﺮﺽ ‪1MU:‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-18‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪30 ms‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 200ms‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻟﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪(4-2-19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪).‬ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻡﺵﻛﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺹﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ‪) PTC‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-20‬ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪(230V‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻴﻢ پﻱچ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺁﺭﻣﻴﭽﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 5TG8 230‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-2-20‬ﻭ ‪(4-2-21‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺴﺘﻮﺭ ‪ PTC‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 4-2-4‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪ 4-2-22‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4-2-24‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ) ‪ OFF (ZE‬ﻭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ) ‪ (ZA‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-2-25‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-26‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻏﺘﺸﺎﺵ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ‪ d.c.‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ‪ a.c.‬ﻣﺮﺩﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 4-2-5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪) AC – 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻲ (ﻭ ‪) AC – 3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ(ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻒﺍﻭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-27‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ )ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ 2 NO‬ﻭ ‪( 1 NC/1‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-2-30‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﺞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺰﺵ ‪ 8mm‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ‪ 4kv‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪230 /‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭘﻼژ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ 400 v AC‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ SELV‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪،50Hz ،230 V AC ،110 V AC ،24 V AC ،12 V AC ،8 V AC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫‪ 110 VDC ،24V DC ،12V DC‬ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‪16A‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 1 ، 2 NO ،1 NO‬ﺻﻠﻴﺒﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 2‬ﺻﻠﻴﺒﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ )ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ( ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻑ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-2-31‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ )ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ‪ (L‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ )ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ( ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ DA‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ DE‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ )ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 2-4-33‬ﺗﺎ ‪ (4-2-34‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪10‬ﺗﺎ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‬

‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ‪ 5TT1300‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ECG‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻼﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ‪ ECG‬ﻛﻪ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺕ ‪ ECG‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪ ECG‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ) ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻭ ‪ (4-2-37‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ 5TT1 302‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ECG‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ECG ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻃﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ECG‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ECG‬ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-38‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ B1‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫‪ B2‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪5‬ﺗﺎ‪ 7‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻇﻬﺮ )ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ ‪ (B1‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ 7‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﺷﺐ )ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ‪ (B1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ )ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 10‬ﺷﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ )ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺖ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﺎﻥ( ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺐ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ (B1‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﺭژﺍﻧﺲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺳﺘﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ )ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻭﺭژﺍﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻓﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻳﺎﻙ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-2-39‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ S‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ )ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻚ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﻩ ‪ 5TT3 180‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻃﻴﻒ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ – ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ‪DROP-OUT‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻮﺭﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﻱ ﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-7‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺎﻧﺴﻴﻮﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺑﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﮔﻠﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻏﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺎﻳﺒﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻧﮓ ‪ BELL‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻑ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻧﺘﺰﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﻓﺎﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻮﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﭙﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺮﻛﻮﻻﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﻮﺍﺭﻳﻮﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻭ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ‬

‫‪50-‬‬ ‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-41‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻨﻜﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ 60Hz‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‪ 48 .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭼﺮﺥ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 3.5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 1.2‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 6‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﺎ ‪ 8‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻇﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻛﻮﺍﺭﺗﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺳﻨﮕﺮﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺭژ ‪ NICD‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 100‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ 3.5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 0.5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺎﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ 8‬ﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﺎ ‪4‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻇﻬﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-2-42‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ LCD‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ‪ EEPROM‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺯﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-44‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪(4-2-45‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-2-46‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ‪.‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ 8‬ﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﺎ ‪6‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻇﻬﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ‪ 20‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ )‪10‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ‪10‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺩﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒ ًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺰﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺎﺛﻴﻪ ﻭﻓﺮﺷﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻭ ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻩ ) ‪ (Duomatic‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺩﻭﻛﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ‪:‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻌﻘﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ‪:‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺩﻛﺶ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺘﻮﺗﺰﺍﻧﺰﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﻮﻳﺶ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﺭﺧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ( ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ‪ 15 s‬ﺭﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ )ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ ( ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0-15min‬ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺩﻭﻛﺎﺭﻩ ‪ DUOMATIC‬ﻭ ﻳﺎﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﻲ )‪ (UDO plus‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻛﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 4-3-27‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺰﺍﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﻫﺮ ‪ VDU‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻮﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ D subminiature‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪D‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ‪ 15.9‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 25‬ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺫﻭﺯﻧﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ : BNC/TNC‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ BNC/TNC‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺍﻛﺴﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ 4GHz‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﺍﻛﺴﻴﺎﻝ ‪50‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﻭ ‪70‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ BNC‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻣﺎﺭﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺪ ﻟﺮﺯﻩ ‪ TNC‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ )‪ : Western (WE‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ western‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ‪ ISDN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎﻱ ‪ WE‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 8‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 4‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 6‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 8‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ :Twinax‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Twinax‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ IBM‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ Twinax‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ Twinax‬ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﻟﺤﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﻨﮕﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ‪:TLU‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺤﺼﺎﺭﺍً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﻜﺲ ﻭﺗﻠﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺮﻧﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ‪ TLU‬ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ TLU‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ ‪ TLU‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ‪ F‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ‪ N‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ‪:‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DELTA profill‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﺮﻭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭ ﻓﻜﺲ( ‪،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪ 4-3‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻳﻨﮓ‬

‫ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ( ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺳﻴﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻊ ﻧﺎﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺳﻮﻳﺞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ :‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻮﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.9-1.3m‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ 18oi‬ﺗﻮﻛﺎﺭ ‪ 180‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺑﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ‪ DELTA matic‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫‪ 2.5m‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ‪ DELTA matic‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪ 230‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪ 270‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺗﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﺯﺵ ﺑﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪DELTA – FERN RF‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﺩﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻄﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﭘﺴﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺰﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ IR‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻭﭘﻠﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ IR‬ﻛﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻴﻢ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻄﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪ ،IR-64K‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻃﻴﻒ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻭﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ 25-50M‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻃﻴﻒ ﻭﺳﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪ DELTA – FERIN‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪1‬ﻭ‪4‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪2‬ﻭ‪3‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻤﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪8mm‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﻲ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ /‬ﺩﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﻤﺮﻱ ﻻﻣﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ :9V‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ 9V‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫‪ IR‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫)ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ( ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ 15m‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﮔﭻ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ‪ 50…60Hz 230v,‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ‪ IR‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ IR‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻛﺘﻲ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﻤﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ DELTA – FERN‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻲ ﻭﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 4-3-47‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4-3-55‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪DELTA- .‬‬
‫‪ FERN‬ﻭ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،DELTA-FERN‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪4-3-56‬ﻭ ‪ 4-3-57‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎء ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﻓﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﮔﭽﺒﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺸﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ DELTA-FERN .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ DELTA-FERN‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪DELTA-‬‬
‫‪ FERN‬ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ DELTA-FERN‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﺍﺗﻘﺎﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺯﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4-3-59‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫)‪ (fire load‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮔﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺭﺩﻳﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻒ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‪ :‬ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮔﻴﺮ‪:‬ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪:‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻼ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪:‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(4-3-60‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،4-3-61‬ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﻘﺎﻕ )ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﺘﻮﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺭﺗﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺗﻴﺸﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪) y‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ( ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺱ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎً ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‪ ،‬ﺁﻻﺭﻣﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻭ ﺁژﻳﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺷﻴﭙﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁژﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺒﺮ ﻛﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 8 V AC‬ﻳﺎ ‪12 V‬‬
‫‪ Ac‬ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 8 V DC‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻨﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 24 V AC/ DC‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ‪ 230 V AC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪ 220 V DC, AC/ DC, 110 V , 60 V AC/DC‬ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻼﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﺎﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪8 V‬‬
‫‪ ، AC‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ 9 V‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ( ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ )ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺷﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻧﮕﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﻴﻦ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺑﺖ )ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ( ‪ PTT‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻧﻮﺑﺖ )‪ (PTT‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(4 -3 -104a‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫‪ ( DOORSET simplex‬ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(4 -3 -106‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻠﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﺒﺮ ﻛﻦ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻠﻴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻦ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻟﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ )ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ(‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ )ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ (5 s‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﺒﺮﻛﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﻼﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺗﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭ ﺿﺪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻭﻻﺭ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻴﻠﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ‪45‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﺷﺘﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ‪ 2- 6‬ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ 7- 12‬ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﻑﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-114‬‬
‫‪ 4 -3‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ‪:‬ﺷﺸﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﻩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ) ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺮ ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ )‬
‫‪ ( RCD‬ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ) ﻣﺜﻼً‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ( ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ) ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ )‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ( ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻭﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Pr EN 50179/DIN VDE 0141 , HD 384.4.41/EC 60364-41/DIN VDE 0100-410‬‬
‫‪HD 384.5.54/IEC 60364-5-54/DIN VDE 0100-540,pr EN 50114/DIN VDE‬‬
‫‪0151,ENV 61024-1/IEC 61024-1/DIN VDE 0185-1 IEC 60364-5-548/DIN‬‬
‫‪VDE 0800-2.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻡﻣﻜﻦ‬ ‫‌‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪233‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺸﻢ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭽﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﻭ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻠﻒ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻮﻻً ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ )ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺟﺮﻗﻪﮔﻴﺮ( ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )ﻓﻠﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻠﺰ( ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻳﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻤﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ( ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﮔﻮﻻﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ‪ ،...‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﻀﻼﺕ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻗﺒﺘﻲ ﻭﺧﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﭘﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﻮﻟﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺞ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺎ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 200‬ﻣﺘﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ )ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ( ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻼ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ پ ‪ 9-1-7‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ‪ 13‬ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻮﺯﻩ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻨﺪ پ ‪ 7-9-1‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ‪ 13‬ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ) ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ( ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ) ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ( ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ – ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ – ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻼﻣﺎﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ( ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻛﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﻤﻜﺸﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -8‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻛﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﻃﻮﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻨﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -11‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -12‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻲﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪ 50 mm‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﻲ ‪ 35mm‬ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ‪16mm‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺸﻌﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ( ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ “ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ” ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﺁﻻﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻕﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؛‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 2/5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦﺁﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 2/5‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ 220/127‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1/6‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪1kV‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ )‪ ( h.v.‬ﻣﻠﺰﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ‪ 1kV‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪( Pr EN 50179/DIN VDE 0141‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ‪ h.v.‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻮﺯﻩ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1kV‬ﻛﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻧﻘﺺ ‪ ،‬ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﻻ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ( ﺗﺎﻛﻴﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 1.5 m‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ ، 30kV‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﻠﺢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪prEN‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻫﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ 50170/DIN VDE 0141‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ 10kV‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 115mm‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﺎ ‪ 50kV‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 215mm‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ‬

‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﻴﻠﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻠﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﻙ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻠﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻭ ﺷﻴﻠﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻙ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ (L.V.) 1000V‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1000V‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪HD 384.4.41/EC 60364-4-41/DIN VDE 0100 V‬‬

‫‪HD 384.5.54/IEC 60364-5-54/DIN VDE 0100-540‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1000V‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫)ﺳﻴﻢ ‪ PE‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( PEN‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ‪ H.v ,L.v.‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻠﺰﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪IEC 60364-5-548/DIN VDE ،‬‬
‫‪ 0800‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ENV 61024-1/IEC 61024-1/DIN‬‬
‫‪ VDE 0185 -1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪. prEN 50179/DIN VDE 0141‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﮔﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ENV 61024- 1/ EC 61024-1/DIN VDE 0185-1‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﻠﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪prEN 50179/VDE 0141‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪1kV‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪Ω 5‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ) ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ ﻳﺎ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ( ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺼﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ) ﻣﺜﻼ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ( ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪RB‬‬ ‫‪50V‬‬
‫≤‬
‫‪RE U 0 − 50V‬‬
‫‪ RB‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ‪ RE ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ‪ U 0‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺳﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻐﺰ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 20 ، 16‬ﻭ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ 1/20‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻼﻫﻚ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﺮﻫﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻮﺷﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪.‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-15‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 2-15‬ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻐﺰ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 4 ، 3 ،2‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ) ‪ (U‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ‪ 40×5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻣﻬﺮﻩ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ . 12‬ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 3-15‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ 700×700×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ‪ 25×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ) ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 1-5‬ﻭ ‪.( 4-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﺮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 38‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ 5/2‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪. ( 5-15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ‪ 5/1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻼﻫﻚ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 6-15‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﮕﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﻠﺢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻟﻮﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﮕﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ) ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺺ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ (‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ‪ρ E‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺼﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫) ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ( 1-5-1‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ prEN 50179/DIN VDE 0141‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-5-1‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﻼﻗﻲ‬ ‫‪40‬ﺗﺎ‪5‬‬
‫ﮔﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻙ ﺭﺱ‬ ‫‪ 200‬ﺗﺎ ‪20‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2500‬ﺗﺎ‪200‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﮓ ﺭﻳﺰﻩ‬ ‫‪ 3000‬ﺗﺎ ‪2000‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪1000‬‬
‫ﺷﻦ‬ ‫‪ 3000‬ﺗﺎ ‪2000‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻧﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ 50 000‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﮕﻼﺥ‬ ‫‪ 30 000‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :2‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ 0.5m‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1m‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻠﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪4L‬‬
‫= ‪RA‬‬ ‫‪. ln‬‬
‫‪2L‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ d‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪( 2cm‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪Ωm‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-5-3‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﺞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-5-2‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ (‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪2L‬‬
‫= ‪RA‬‬ ‫‪. ln‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ‬
‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪2D‬‬
‫= ‪RA‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪. ln‬‬
‫‪ D‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫‪L‬‬
‫‪=D‬‬
‫‪ π‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ‬
‫‪( 1.5cm‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ρE‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ Ωm‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ prEN 50179/DIN VDE 0141‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ )‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-5-2‬ﻭ ‪ ( 1-5-3‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪2.E‬‬
‫= ‪PA‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪2.E‬‬
‫= ‪PA‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪3.D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪2.E‬‬
‫= ‪PA‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪2.D‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫‪ D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﺭ ) ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ R A‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪50179/DIN‬‬
‫‪ prEN VDE 0141‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 500m‬ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ Ω 2-15‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 40m‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻫﻤﮕﻦ ﭘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻮﺑﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﻭﺑﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻻ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﻙ ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ρE‬‬
‫= ‪PA‬‬
‫( ‪ L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪.‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪L ):‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﺪﻳﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-5-3‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻴﻜﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻟﻴﺎژ ﻣﺴﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﻲ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺭﻭﭘﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ( ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ prEN 50179/DIN VDE 0141‬ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ . ( 1-5-4‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ‪ tf‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺒﻨﺎء ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪LK′′‬‬
‫=‪A‬‬
‫‪ G‬ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬
‫‪t F = 1s‬‬ ‫‪l K′′ 2 E = 12.5 KA‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻَّ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ‪: h.v.‬‬
‫‪t F = 0.5s‬‬ ‫‪l K′′ 2 E = 27.8 KA‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ‪: l.v.‬‬
‫ﺟﻨﺲ ‪ :‬ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ، 1-5-4‬ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ) ﺧﻂ‬
‫‪ ( 4‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫) ﻛﻪ ‪( t F = 1s‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪G=70 A/mm‬‬
‫‪ ) G= 100 A/mm‬ﻛﻪ ‪( t F = 0.5s‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ‪: h.v.‬‬
‫‪27.8.10 3 A‬‬
‫=‪A‬‬ ‫‪= 278mm 2‬‬
‫‪27.8.10 3 A‬‬ ‫‪100 A / mm‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫=‪A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪= 180mm 2‬‬
‫‪70 A / mm‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-5-4‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ - 1‬ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺳﺮﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﺲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﻣﺲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ - 4‬ﻣﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﻠﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻣﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺳﺮﺏ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪-‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ‪ :‬ﭘﻨﺞ ﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺑﺮﻕ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ NT‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻳﺎﺩﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺮﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﮕﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﺸﻚ ‪ ،‬ﺻﺨﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺳﻨﮕﻼﺧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﮕﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ( ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ =RB‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ) ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻫﻢ ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻫﻢ‬

‫‪ = RE‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺁﻣﺎﺭﻱ ( ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫‪ = U0‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺧﻨﺜﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ )‪ 220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ (‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ =50‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫پ‪-‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ‪ ( RS‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪ IA‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ) ‪( POOL‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ‪ ( RL‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪ UE‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ IA‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 8-15‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ : 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭼﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪=R‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻫﻢ‬

‫‪=ρ‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪=D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪=L‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ρ=250‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﻢ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪D=6/1‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ‪ L =244‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ 1/0‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 10‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ‪ 5/2‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 3-5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭼﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 10-5 ، 9-5‬ﻭ ‪ 11-5‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺮ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻳﺦ ﺯﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﻓﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ 2 :‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫‪-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ 8/0 :‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﻐﺰ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪2-5‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻼﻫﻚ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺷﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻼﻫﻚ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 15‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 20‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻨﮓ ﺧﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻛﻪ ﺯﻏﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﭼﺎﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻚ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻛﻪ ﺯﻏﺎﻝ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ‪15‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﭼﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺳﺮﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﻛﺮﻳﺰﻱ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﻩ ﺣﻔﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﺎﻫﻬﺎ ) ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻼﺏ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ (‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 3-5‬ﻭ ‪ 4-5‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 5-5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﻣﺴﻲ ﭘﺮﺳﻲ ) ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺱ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻚ (ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﻛﺴﻴﮋﻥ ) ﻟﺤﻴﻢ ﺳﺨﺖ ( ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺬﻭﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺮﻓﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮ ﺍﻛﺘﻔﺎ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻻ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ) ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ( ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻖ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ‪ 25×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺣﻮﺿﭽﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪، 2-5‬‬
‫‪ 4-5 ، 3-5‬ﻭ ‪ 5-5‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ) .‬ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ 5-5 ، 4-5 ، 3-5 ، 2-5‬ﻭ ‪( 7+-5‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻳﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 5/1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻒ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ » ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ« ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺣﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﺰ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﺸﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-5‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻒ ﻭ ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺞ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 12-5‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﻨﮕﻼﺧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻮﺑﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻔﺮ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﭙﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ‪ 25×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ 60‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 80‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺁﺯﻣﻮﺩﻩ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﻞ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺟﻨﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺲ ﺧﺎﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍ )ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻠﺴﻴﻮﺱ (‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻧﺪﮔﻲ ‪48‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻼﺕ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-5‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪267‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ )ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ(‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ )ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ(‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‪،‬ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻤﻌﻲ‪،‬ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪/‬ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺘﻲ‪،‬ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎ‪،‬ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺸﻬﺎ‪،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‪،‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‪،‬ﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ﺩﺭﻃﺮﺡ ﻭﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ)ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ(ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮﺑﻨﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ‪،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻨﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ )ﺑﺮﺝ‪،‬ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫‪،‬ﺗﺠﻤﻌﻲ ‪،‬ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪،‬ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ (‪،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﻨﺎ) ﭼﻮﺏ‪،‬ﺁﺟﺮ ‪،‬ﺑﺘﻦ‪،‬ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ (‪،‬‬
‫) ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﭘﻮﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ‪،‬ﺗﭙﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺭ‪،‬ﻛﻮﻫﺴﺘﺎﻧﻲ ( ‪،‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﺗﺸﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺭﻋﺪﻭﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ‪،‬ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ) ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ( ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺬﺏ‪،‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ‪،‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1753‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﻜﻠﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﻧﻜﻠﻴﻦﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻛﻠﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ )‪ (ESE‬ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭ ﻧﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ) ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﻜﻠﻴﻦ ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ) ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ( ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻗﻔﺲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺝ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺶ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ) ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫(ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪2-6‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ) ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ )ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ( ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ‪،‬ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ‬
‫) ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺳﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ( ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪،‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ‪،‬ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ‪ SB 6651 , APFN 78 , CEI 1024‬ﻭ ‪ CFN 17-102‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﮔﻲ ﻭﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺶ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺳﺮﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﻭﺵ ﻏﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺭﻱ ﮔﺮﻡ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﺎ ‪60‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺶ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎ ﺭچﻩ ﻭﺳﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻚ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ) ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺻﻴﻘﻠﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﺮﻣﻴﻠﻪ ) ﺗﻚ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ( ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-6‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ – ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺻﻴﻘﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺁﻥ ) ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺮﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ( ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻭﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ).‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ . ( 1-6‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺗﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﻚ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ )‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪2020×3‬‬
‫‪ ( SB 6651‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ) ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻭﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ 20×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 70‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ) ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ( ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ CEI 1024-1‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ 2-6‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ )‪ ( ESE‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪CFN 17-102‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺮژ ﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻼﻃﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻓﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺭﺍﻳﻮﻧﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ) ‪ ( ESE‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭژﺋﻮﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺁ ﺯﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺲ ‪،‬ﺁﻟﻴﺎژ ﻣﺲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺳﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 120‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺶ ﻭﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁ ﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪30×2‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ( NCF 17-102‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻌﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5/1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻞ ‪،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬ﺩﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻠﺴﻜﻮﭘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﺍﺗﻜﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 3-6‬ﻭ ‪ 4-6‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺩﻓﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﭼﺎﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺍﻫﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﻇﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﻜﻠﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻨﺒﺪﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ ).‬ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﮔﭻ ﻭﺁﻫﻚ ﻭﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺩﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺩﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ‪.‬‬
‫چ‪ -‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻨﻴﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﻜﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻭﺩﻛﺸﻬﺎ ﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺩﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻨﺒﺪﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮔﻨﺒﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﮔﻨﺒﺪ‪،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮔﻨﺒﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮔﻨﺒﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﮔﻨﺒﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺝ ﺳﻴﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ‪،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﻨﻴﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ‪،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻭﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﺍژ ﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺩﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ‪،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ‪1-6‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ‪،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ APFN 78‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﻲ ﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﻭﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻮﻙ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ) ‪ 254‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ( ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻧﻲ ﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﻭﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺒﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 20‬ﻓﻮﺕ ) ‪ 6‬ﻣﺘﺮ( ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪24‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻ )‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ (ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 25‬ﻓﻮﺕ ) ‪ 6/7‬ﻣﺘﺮ ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 60‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 5-14‬ﺍﻟﻒ ﻭﺏ(‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺎﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ‪،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 15‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ).‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 5-6‬پ ﻭﺕ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﺭﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺎ ‪ 1800‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 20×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1800‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ 25×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻲ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ) ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻭﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺎ ‪90‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ 18‬ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 20×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 90‬ﻣﺘﺮ ‪ 25×3‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ) ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻭﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻼﻙ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ) ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ( ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻴﻬﺎﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪).‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪( 6-6‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 360‬ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﺩﻭﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ‬
‫‪ 270‬ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 360‬ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺩﻭﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ‪ 630 ،‬ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ 3‬ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ‪ 900 ،‬ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ 4‬ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ‪ 1170 ،‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪1200‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪ 5‬ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1024-1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻗﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ CEI‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-6‬ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻳﺎﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﻲ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﻱ ﻏﻠﻄﺎﻥ‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪CEI 1024-1‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-6‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 2-4-6‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ )‪ (ESE‬ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ )‪ (ESE‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ CFN 17-102‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 60‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻭﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺘﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﭘﺎﻻﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫چ‪ -‬ﻣﻮﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻭﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺡ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻭﺩﻛﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺥ‪ -‬ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﺤﻲ ﻭﺭﻓﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ‪،‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ) ‪ (Rnp‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ )‬
‫‪ ( hn‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻣﻲ ﺁ ﻳﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪( 7-6‬‬
‫‪ : hn‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Rnp‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻫﺮﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ) ‪ ( Rp‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻮﻙ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ) ‪( h‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ )‪( ΔT‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪ h ≥ 5 m‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ]‪ [1‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 8-6‬ﺍﻟﻒ ‪،‬ﺏ ﻭپ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ‪ h < 5‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪8-14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﺏ ﻭپ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[1‬‬
‫‪ : Rp‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ‬

‫‪ : h‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﻮﻙ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬
‫‪ : D‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ : Δ L‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﻳﻪ ﮔﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻙ ﭘﺎ ﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ‪ , D=20 m ,1‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬

‫ﻛﻼﺱ‪ , D=45 m , 2‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ‪ , D=60 m , 3‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﺮﻑ ﻭﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ CFN 17-102‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻼﺱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ CFN 17-102‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪ 5-6‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻔﺲ ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺗﻚ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪( 1-6‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 50‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ‪،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ؛‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ APFN 78‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ CEI 1024-1‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ( 14-6‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﺪ‪).‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪( 14-14‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺁﺭﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﻤﭙﻨﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺩﺭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺷﻴﺮﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﻤﭙﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ )ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ( ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻭﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻻ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻭﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ‪،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ‪،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ) ‪ 9-6‬ﻭ‪ (10-6‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ )‪ ( 11-6‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ )‪(11-6‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ – ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎء ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2-5-6‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ)‪(ESE‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ‪،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﻙ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺩﻛﺶ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪،‬ﻛﻼﻫﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﻛﺶ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻛﻞ ) ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻚ( ﻭ ﺩﺭﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺷﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺩﻭﮔﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﻛﻞ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 2000‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﺮﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺁﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﭘﻮﺷﺸﻲ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.( 17-14‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 28‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ ( 2×30‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‬
‫)‪ ( 30×5/2‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻒ ﺑﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ 11-14‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻤﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 20‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪( 18-6‬‬
‫‪ 12-2-5-14‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻴﻎ ﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 5/1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ » ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ « ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﻳﻤﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺁﻥ )ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ( ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﻤﭙﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺷﻴﺮﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺏ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ) ‪ ( d‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ )‬
‫‪ ( s‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ CFN 17-102‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺁﺭﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﭘﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻫﻤﭙﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺶ‬
‫‪ 75‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺶ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﻲ ﻫﻤﭙﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺶ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﻤﭙﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﻫﻤﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎء ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺫﺭﺧﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫چ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﮕﻴﺮ ) ‪(ESE‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﭙﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪301‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻲﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺱ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪QC = U .I . sin ϕ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪QC = 3U .I . sin ϕ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ )ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ( ﺍﺯ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:6-1‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ 20‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ) ‪ 4/4‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ( ‪ 50‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ‪ 22‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ )ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ(‬
‫‪220‬‬
‫=‪I‬‬ ‫‪= 10‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪W = 220 × 10 × 1 = 2200‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮﻱ )ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎء(‬
‫‪220‬‬
‫=‪I‬‬ ‫‪= 10‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪W = 220 × 10 × 0.5 = 1100‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮﻱ )ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ(‬
‫‪220‬‬
‫=‪I‬‬ ‫‪= 10‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪W = 220 × 10 × 0 = 0‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺍﺑﺪﺍً ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻛﻢ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺟﺮﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎء‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬
‫‪ C‬ﻓﺎﺭﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-6‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ :1-6‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ‪ C‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫∫‪C‬‬
‫= ‪Vm sin ωt‬‬ ‫‪idt‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪i (t ) = Vm Cω sin(ωt + 90‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﺍﻟﻘﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪V m Ve‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪I m I e Cω‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪Cω‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:6-2‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﭙﺪﺍﻧﺲ ‪ 22‬ﺍﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 0/75‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪ 220‬ﻭﻟﺖ ‪ 50‬ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪220‬‬
‫=‪I‬‬ ‫‪= 10‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪cos φ = 0.75 ⇒ φ = 41.41‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻴﺰﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 7/5‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ‪ 6/61‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ)‪(1-3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪220‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪= 33.26‬‬
‫‪Cω 6.61‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪Cω = 0.03007‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪C = 9.57 × 10 −5 farad‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ‪Un‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻮﺛﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪ Un ،‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪ Un ،‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍً ‪ 30‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 2/3‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪ 380‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭ ‪ 500‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ 50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 48500 IEC 70 , 70 ; VDE 0560 ; DIN‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 2781‬ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ IEC 70 , 70 A‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ -40‬ﺗﺎ ‪+50‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 1000‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1000‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ -40‬ﻭ ‪ -25‬ﻭ ‪ -10‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-6‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-6‬ﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ )ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ(‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫)ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ(‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬
‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬
‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪45‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -40/+40‬ﻭ ‪ -20/+40‬ﻭ ‪ -10/+40‬ﻭ ‪-10/+45‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻓﺴﺎﺩﻧﺎﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﭻﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﺮﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﺳﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1/1‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 1/3‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ‪ 1/5‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻞ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﻨﮕﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍﻍﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ) ‪ (Un‬ﺑﻪ ‪ 50‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫‪ 660‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ 5 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ‪ %10‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ cos φ‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 0/90‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1/0‬ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ‪ cos φ = 1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ cos φ .1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻮﺭﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪= tan φ ⇒ cos φ‬‬
‫‪1 + tan 2 φ‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ‪ cos φ‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪) I × cos φ‬ﺁﻣﭙﺮ( × ‪) U‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ( × ‪) PW = 3‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ(‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ F‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 2-11‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ‪ cos φ‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ 0/60‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ 0/94‬ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ 0/60‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ 0/94‬ﺑﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ F‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 0/97‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ F‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪) PW × F‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ( = ‪) PC‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ(‬
‫‪ - PC‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‪ - PW ،‬ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‪ - F ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ � ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ، �HRC‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪1F‬‬ ‫‪F0‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ 1/5‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ 0/8‬ﺿﺮﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ‪ 25‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ‪ HRC‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ 1/5‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1. On-load air-break isolating switch‬‬
‫‪2. High rupturing Capacity‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻭﺯﺍﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻠﺰﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ‪ S‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺬﻫﻦ ﺳﭙﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺖ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻮﺳﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﺭﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ‪ Φ‬ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ‪ ) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪. ( 1-6-2‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ) ‪ (S‬ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻭﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪S = P 2 + Q 2 ( KVA).‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ) ‪ ( cos φ‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪cos φ = p s‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺖ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ cosφ‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ cosφ‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ φC‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫) ‪φ = P.(tan φ1 − tan φ2‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ، 1-6-3‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ) ‪ (QC  Q1‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ a‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪Qc = 0.3 × a × S ( KVar‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ S‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ cos φ = 0.9‬ﻭﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ cosφ = 0.75‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﺾ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪Wb − Ww . tan Φ 2‬‬

‫= ‪Qc‬‬ ‫‪(kVar ).‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪ Wb‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ )‪، (k varh‬‬
‫‪ Ww‬ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ )‪، ( kwh‬‬
‫‪ t‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ )‪، (h‬‬

‫‪ tan φ‬ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ cos φ‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ‪ ، cos φ1‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ . ( SIMEAS‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ‪ 3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺖ)ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ(‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ (1-6-1‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Qc = U 2 .ω.C.10 −3‬‬
‫‪Qc‬‬
‫= ‪lc‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ )‪ (y‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ( ∆ ) ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ )‪(kv‬‬ ‫‪ QC‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ )‪(kvar‬‬

‫‪ C‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ) ‪(µF‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ )‪(A‬‬ ‫‪LC‬‬
‫‪ f‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ )‪(HZ‬‬ ‫‪ ω‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ) ‪f) ( S π (2‬‬
‫‪−1‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-6-1‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬

‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪﺭ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪siGUT‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 5kvar ،‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 25kvar‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ 230 v 50/60 HZ‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ، 690 VAC‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺸﻚ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻧﻴﺘﺮﻭژﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ‬ ‫‪ ) Ip 20‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﻲ (‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪× l n 1.5‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 122mm‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ،142mm‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 204mm‬ﻭ ‪ ) 240mm‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ (‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-25/D‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ 0.2 w/kvar‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪100 000h‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ 1/3‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ) ‪ ( QC‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ) ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ، ( 2500 v‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪ f2‬‬
‫‪Q2 = Q1  2‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ U1‬‬ ‫‪ f1‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺲ ‪ 2‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻜﻦ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﻣﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ‪ n‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ A‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ B‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ D‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪δD + α B 2 + A 2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ‪ C‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ B – C‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪A 2 + (B − C‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪βC‬‬
‫‪δD + α A 2 + (B − C )2 +‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﻟﻴﺎﻧﻪ ‪ S‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪βC‬‬
‫‪S = α B 2 + A 2 − α A 2 + (B − C ) −‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪C‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫[‬ ‫]‬ ‫‪(B − C ) = β‬‬

‫‪−1‬‬
‫) ‪= 0 ⇒ α A 2 + (B − C‬‬
‫‪dS‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪dC‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪B−C‬‬ ‫‪β‬‬
‫=‬
‫) ‪A 2 + (B − C‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪nα‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ sin φ‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪β ‬‬
‫‪cos φ = cos sin −1‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪nα ‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪6-3‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 380‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ 500‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ‪ 2000‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ﻭﺉ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺭﺍ ‪ 1200‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ‪ 300‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻭﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 0/75‬ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮﻱ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫پ‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ؟‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ )‪ (2-3‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ 2000 ‬‬
‫‪cos sin −1 ‬‬ ‫‪= 0.9165‬‬
‫‪ 500 × 10 ‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫‪cos φi = 0.750‬‬
‫‪sin φi = 0.6614‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫‪cos φ f = 0.9165‬‬
‫‪sin φ f = 0.40‬‬
‫‪ ، X‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫[‬ ‫]‬
‫‪X = 1200 sin φi − cos φi × tan φ f = 1200[0.6614 − 0.75 × 0.4364] = 400.92 KVAR‬‬
‫‪400.92‬‬
‫= ‪IC‬‬ ‫‪× 1000 = 351.69‬‬
‫‪380 3‬‬
‫‪380‬‬
‫= ‪XC‬‬
‫‪351.69‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪1.08 X C‬‬ ‫‪= 1.08‬‬
‫‪2πfc‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫=‪C‬‬ ‫‪= 2947 µf‬‬
‫‪2π × 50 × 1.08‬‬
‫‪300 × 0.6614 = 198.42‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫‪198.42 − 400.92 = −202.5‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ − 202.5 ‬‬
‫‪cos φ f = cos  tan −1 ‬‬ ‫‪ = 0.74‬‬
‫‪‬‬ ‫‪ 300 × 0.75 ‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺸﻔﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻣﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻼﻙ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ )ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‪ (1-6‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺮﻭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺯﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﮔﺮﻣﺴﻴﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﭙﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺟﻮﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺣﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺫﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺎﻣﺒﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﻩ ﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻏﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺗﺸﮕﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ‪ NEC‬ﻭ ‪ IEC‬ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-4‬‬
‫‪. ( 1-6‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻱﺍ ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 10%‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ( ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﻱ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ) ‪ ( Q c‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 90%‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪. (1-6-5‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ - 2‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫‪ - 3‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ ‪ -‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺖ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -5‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺭﮔﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ‪ :‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 6‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 12‬ﭘﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻳﻴﭻ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ 6‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 12‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ ‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺪﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻩ ‪ -‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺍﻧﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪319‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﻧﻬﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﭽﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺮﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺁﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺗﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ‪،‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪،‬ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )‪ (battery‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ‪ battery‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﺪ )ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ( ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ) ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-2‬‬
‫‪ (5-2‬ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ‬
‫‪(5-2-3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﭘﻨﻞ )ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﻣﺜﻼً ﻓﺮﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻭﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻒ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻴﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻜﺒﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﻜﺒﻮﺗﻲ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ ) .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(5-2-6‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ )ﺧﺮﻃﻮﻣﻲ ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻨﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ 60 ْ c‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ‪ pvc‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﻴﻠﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻼً ﻣﺴﻠﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (5-2-8a‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎًﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﻭﻟﭙﻼﻙ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ( 5-2-8a‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺒﺮﻩ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﭘﻨﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ) ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﻛﻴﻨﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫ﻭ ﻏﺬﺍﺧﻮﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﻳﺨﺎﻧﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ )ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ( ‪،‬ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻫﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ )ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ‪،‬ﻛﻢ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ (ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1kv‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻢ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ )ﺳﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ( ﻭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ) ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻗﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺸﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ) ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﻔﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ‪،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻛﺘﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺷﺖﻉﺍﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ) ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ( ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺗﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺪ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻔﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺶ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺸﺖ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻋﻴﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻄﻌﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺁﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺘﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻓﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺒﺮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻫﺘﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺎ ‪،‬ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻃﻔﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ‪ ...‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻃﻴﻒ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎ ‪،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ‪ 3500 w‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ 4500 w‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ )‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ( ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯﻱ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺘﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﻔﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺘﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪،‬ﺳﺮﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ‪،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ‪،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﻗﻼﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺼﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪.‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (5-4-1‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻛﻮﺭﺍﺗﻴﻮ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﺗﻮﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻴﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪،‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﺮﻣﺮ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻟﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺘﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻫﺘﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﻟﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫‪12V‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺬﺍ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻣﻴﻬﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺘﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻮﻱ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻭ ﺟﺬﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻓﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژﻥ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻭژﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻭﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﻨﻘﺶ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻮﺭﻫﺎ ( ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻔﻲ ﺳﻦ ‪،‬ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪،‬ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ‪،‬ﺍﻭﺭﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮﺋﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﭘﺮﻭژﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺴﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﺎﺕ ﺳﺮ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻜﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺩﻛﻮﺭﺍﺗﻴﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺐ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﻫﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺰ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﻳﺸﻲ ﻻﺯﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪:‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ‪،‬ﭘﺰﺷﻚ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺣﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺫﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪15 S‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ‪،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺁﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪-4‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪-5‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻭﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫‪-6‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﻔﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﻭ‬
‫‪ -7‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮔﺎﺯ ‪،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ‪،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺧﻼء ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﻴﻬﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ‪،‬ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﺩﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ( ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ 5.1‬ﻣﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﻼﺱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ( ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻛﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 5-5-1‬ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪DIN VDE 0107 TABIE 1‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﺱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬
‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻃﺐ ﺳﻮﺯﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻠﻴﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﺳﻜﭙﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﺎﻟﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻮﺗﺮﺍﭘﻲ‬ ‫ﺭﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺯﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻛﺘﺘﺮ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻟﻮژﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻧﭙﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻣﺎﺳﺎژ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﺮﭘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻳﻨﮓ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﻧﺪﻭﺳﻜﭙﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫)ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ( ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻟﻮژﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺗﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻠﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻛﺘﺘﺮ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻥ ) ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻼ ﮔﭻ(‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ )ﻣﺜ ً‬ ‫ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻴﻬﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺰ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺘﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻨﻴﻜﻲ ﺯﺍﻳﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ (‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻃﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﻭﺭژﺍﻧﺲ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﻟﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻃﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻮﻙ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ )‪ECG (echo cardio graphic‬‬
‫ﻭ )‪ EAG(elctro ancepalo graphy‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭ ﺁﻧﺴﻔﺎﻟﻮﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺁﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﺳﻂ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ 6 mm‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ‪ EAG‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﭻ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺴﻔﺮ – ﺑﺮﻧﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻮﺭﻱ ‪ 50 -100 mm‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ‪ 0.8 mm‬ﻋﻤﻼً ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺁﻣﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﭻ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻟﺤﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻫﻢ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺪﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﺭﺷﻴﺘﻜﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ 5-5-.3‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 5-5-3‬ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪m‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‬ ‫‪0.75‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻭ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪10mm2 -70 mm 2‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫– ‪– 95 mm 2 – 185mm 2‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬
‫‪> 185 mm2‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ) ‪ ( n-1‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ‪ IT‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ‪10kv‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ 20kv‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻏﺘﺸﺎﺵ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﻮﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺩﻳﻔﻬﺎﻱ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﺎ ‪) 8m‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ (6m‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻭ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻝﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺧﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ])‪ [W/(m2.lx‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ‪ .(14m‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﻓﻠﻜﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ‪ HQL‬ﻭ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ )‪ (ECG dynamic‬ﻭ ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺭ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ( ﻭ ‪ ، Instabus EIB‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ )ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ( ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﻗﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺷﻴﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ‪ 10w/m2‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ‪.300 lx‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ 5kW/1000m3‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺳﻜﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪100‬‬
‫‪ W/m2‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻘﻒ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ 14m‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎﻱ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻟﺤﻈﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﻢﻛﺸﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻓﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ )ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪ instabus EIB‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪ ،instabus EIB‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ..‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ( ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪2000‬‬
‫‪ m2‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ ،1 lx‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 20 cm‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ )‪ (Switch over‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻳﻢ(‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﺯﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1s‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ )ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ‪ 8‬ﺗﺎ ‪ (12 s‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻔﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺗﺶﻧﺸﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻭ‬

‫‪ -4‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪(230/400‬‬
‫)‪ ، V AC‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﺎﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﭼﺸﻢﭘﻮﺷﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ CO‬ﻭ ﺁﻻﺭﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﺗﺶﺳﻮﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪) ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪،CO‬ﺍﺯ ‪ (100cm3/m3)100ppm‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ :CO‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ CO‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﻚ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺭﺍژﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺳﺮﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﻙ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﺷﻴﺘﻜﺖ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬
‫‪ 100 A‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺳﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ I.v.h.b.c.‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﺎ ‪ 400 A‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺶ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎ ‪:‬ﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺸﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ )ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ( ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪ 25 mm2‬ﺭﺍﻩﺣﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺗﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﮕﺮ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻻﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(5 -8 -6‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪1.85 cm, 1. 10‬‬
‫‪ m‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ )ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ( ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ‪ STAB‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ‪ SIMBOX 63‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﺗﻚ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(5 -8 -7‬ﭘﺎﻧﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 550 mm, 950 mm‬ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻳﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4 mm2‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ SIFLA‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻔﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮔﭻ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ، 4 mm2‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ‪ NYM‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻳﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﭻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ )ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ( ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ )ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻼﺑﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻴﺮﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺒﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺯﻧﻲ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ‪،CD‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‪.‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(5 -8-11‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺯﺭﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪:‬ﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ )ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻫﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺸﻮﻳﻲ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺟﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﻣﭗ ﭘﻴﻠﻮﺕ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻻﻣﭗ ﭘﻴﻠﻮﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ ﭘﻴﻠﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻻﻣﭗﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ‪ N‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﺸﻮﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﺯﺭﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ ،CD‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺭﻭ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻭ ‪ (...‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ )ﺩﺭ( ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻮﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺱ‪:‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺍﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩژﻧﻜﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺯﺭﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﺨﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﺘﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺳﻮﻛﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻨﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ )ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ‪ 16 A‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ( ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺸﻮﻳﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺴﻔﻮﺭﻣﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺰﻭﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪:‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺭﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ )ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﻛﻦ ﻏﺬﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﭽﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻮﺩ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍﻛﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺟﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺎﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻨﻚ ﻇﺮﻓﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﻦ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻬﺎﻱ ﻟﺒﺎﺳﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﻨﻬﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻ ًﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺷﭙﺰﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺏ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻛﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻮﺷﺸﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﮕﻴﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ‪ 2.25m‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﮋﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ‪ 16 mm‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 30 mm‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﭼﺮﺍﻍﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﭼﺮﺍﻏﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣﭗ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻼﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻛﻼﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ )ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻏﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻛﻨﻴﻦ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﻣﻴﻬﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺑﺖ )‪ ،(PTT‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺁﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻛﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

تاسیسات الکتریکی و صنعتی

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

تاسیسات الکتریکی و صنعتی

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ(‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 1-1‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ ‪ 1-‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ TN-S‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻲ )‪ (PE‬ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪TT‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪TT‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -6‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ‪،‬‬

‫)ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﺎﺗﻮﺭﻱ(‬ ‫‪-1‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬

‫‪ 2-2‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 2-3‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻜﻮﻧﻲ ﻭ ‪(...‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫‪ 3-2‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ‪UPS‬‬

‫‪ 1-3-3‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ‪ UPS‬ﻛﻪ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻮﻱ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬

‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻮﺯ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﻕ )ﺩﻳﻤﺎﻧﺪ(‬

‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ –ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-1-2‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﻢﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (g‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺛﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬

‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫‪u nu′ +‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ـ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬

‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪C‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ %‬ﺑﺎﺯﺍﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺸﻌﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ‪ C = γV f2 / 0.33 ×10 5‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 1-4‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫) ‪∆U 1Cosα = ∆U f1 + ∆U 01 − 0.5(∆U 02 − ∆U 03‬‬ ‫)‪(1-11-a‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ )‪:(1-6-a‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 1-13‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1-4‬ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ )ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ( ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-8‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1-9‬‬

‫‪ - ∆U 0Cosα‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﻝ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ 1‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1-5‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ‬

‫‪ -S‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺳﻴﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ‪:1-4‬‬

‫‪ -1-6‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺸﻲ – ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻲ(‬

‫‪ = A‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫‪d = 1.3 A‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ‪-2‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﺮﻗﺮﻩ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻢ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻢﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ 2-2‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻏﻼﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻼﻑ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ) 2-2‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ( ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ × ‪ 0.3‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭ‬

‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ) ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ (‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻳﺎ ‪C‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ) ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺩﺍﺭ ( ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬

‫‪335+16‬‬ ‫‪325+10‬‬ ‫‪416‬‬ ‫‪410‬‬ ‫‪46‬‬ ‫‪44 42.5‬‬ ‫‪41.5‬‬